Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Disclaimer
This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any
testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this Scheme Document must be conducted in accordance with
BRE Global Limited’s approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and
associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or approved parties (“Approved Party
(ies)”). Any party wishing to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval
must apply to BRE Global Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, in order to qualify as an Approved Party;
a fee will normally be charged. BRE Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts
no responsibility for any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action to
prevent such unauthorised use or distribution.
Copyright
The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the
contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded
and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted
material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for
commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright
status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or
documents.
Trade Marks
BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and
may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 i
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Acknowledgements
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group
staff members, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM Assessors
and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways.
BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method
and contribute towards a sustainable built environment.
ii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
About BRE Global Limited
BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body
offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market.
BRE Global Limited’s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.
BRE Global Limited’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing
laboratories.
1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world’s leading environmental
assessment method for buildings
2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services.
BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE
Group.
E enquiries@breglobal.com
www.breglobal.com
www.greenbooklive.com
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 iii
blank page
Table of contents
Terms and conditions i
Acknowledgements ii
Table of contents v
List of figures xi
Introduction 1
Introduction to BREEAM 2
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme 7
Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 15
Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 16
Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 17
Minimum standards 20
Management 31
Man 05 Aftercare 53
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 v
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Energy 115
Transport 166
Water 195
Materials 218
Waste 258
vi Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change 280
Pollution 316
Innovation 354
Appendices 358
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types 359
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments 364
Index 378
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 vii
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
List of tables
Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues 5
Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 12
Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met. 62
Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met. 66
Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights 68
Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types 100
Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions 102
Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy
load from significantly contributing systems. 158
Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. 168
viii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types 174
Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type 178
Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types 186
Table - 33: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption. 197
Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from
manufacturers’ product information to complete the assessment. 201
Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points 220
Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking 226
Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings 230
Table - 41: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows 237
Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM ‘responsible
sourcing of materials’ points. 240
Table - 45: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to
consider. 250
Table - 49: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high-grade aggregate specified per application (where
present) that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate 268
Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value 294
Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land
Cover Parcels plots’ in Great Britain. 301
Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity 312
Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP 323
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 ix
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
x Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
List of figures
Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark 3
Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline
Plan of Work 2013 8
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 xi
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM
Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM
Operations Manual, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM licence. This document should be used by non-
BREEAM Assessors for reference purposes only.
xii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document
This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the
publication date for each issue of this document is provided below.
Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions are not
identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available separately. BREEAM
Assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM Assessor's Extranet. The list of changes is also available to
other parties on request; please email breeam@bre.co.uk.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 xiii
blank page
Introduction
Introduction
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 1
Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Introduction to BREEAM
BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s first sustainability rating scheme
for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in building design,
construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a
network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps
clients measure and reduce the environmental impacts of their buildings and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets.
To-date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 260,000 building assessments across the building life cycle and it is being
applied in over 50 countries.
Aims of BREEAM
To mitigate the life cycle impacts of buildings on the environment
To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits
To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings
To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains.
Objectives of BREEAM
To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact
To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of
buildings and the wider built environment.
To define a robust, cost-effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations.
To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of
buildings.
To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of buildings with
a reduced life cycle impact on the environment.
To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives.
Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts.
Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality.
Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions.
Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous
performance standard for defining environmental quality.
Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered.
Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the ‘local’ context including
regulation, climate and sector.
Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding and
accessibility.
Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label.
Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy
and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs.
Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the
‘Sustainability of Construction Works’ prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical Committee
CEN/TC 350.
Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the
underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market
capability).
2 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Introduction to BREEAM Introduction
The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE
Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These
schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators
(NSOs), across a range of countries.
For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.com.
Independent BREEAM Assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment
using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools.
Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate
provides formal verification that the Assessor has completed an assessment of a building in accordance with the
requirements of the scheme and its quality standards and procedures.
A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a building’s BREEAM rating, at the time of certification,
accurately reflects its performance against the BREEAM standard.
Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of a building can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain
the certification mark, (see below) or by searching the BREEAM buildings listings on www.greenbooklive.com. Examples of a
BREEAM UK New Construction certificate can be found in Appendix H.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 3
Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the
requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a
common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, whilst
ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices.
The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM
Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board.
To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain scheme
operations accredited to International Standards. In the UK, BRE Global Limited is accredited by the United Kingdom
Accreditation Service (UKAS) to:
BS EN ISO 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) for
BREEAM Assessors.
BS EN 45011 (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAM
assessment process.
BRE Global Limited is also certified to ISO 9001 for all its BREEAM related activities.
As a certification body accredited by UKAS, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The
operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review.
The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are
acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly.
The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited’s
standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the
development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.
4 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
BREEAM UK New Construction Introduction
The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the environment in a
robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by clients and their project
teams at key stages in the design and construction process.
This enables the client, through the BREEAM Assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and
reflect the performance of their new building against best practice in an independent and robust manner.
This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of
environmental issues see Table - 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label (section 3
describes how a BREEAM rating is calculated).
Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues
Energy Transport
Water Materials
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 5
Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Pollution Innovation
6 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Introduction
Construction scheme
Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme via the BREEAM Assessor is essential for
ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new build procurement process. Without this, the ability to cost
effectively optimise the building’s environmental performance and achieve the desired BREEAM rating will be compromised.
Appointing a BREEAM Assessor or Accredited Professional early in the project will help in achieving the target rating without
undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and potential solutions.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 7
Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work
2013
8 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Introduction
Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and the
RIBA Outline Plan of Work 2013.
This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM Assessor.
Clients can view up-to-date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Accredited
Professionals at Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com.
It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the
opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the procurement process. This means that the client,
design team, principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play
throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified
BREEAM rating.
The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this, BRE
Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM Assessor and/or BREEAM Accredited
Professional no later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner where practical. This
will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low
or no cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 9
Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Scheme
This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to:
1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating
2. Enable BRE global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM Assessors assessment report, in accordance
with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited
3. As an aid for BREEAM Accredited Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in terms of defining,
monitoring and successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating
4. As a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being BREEAM assessed.
1. Introduction (section 1)
2. Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version (section 2)
3. Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildingsScoring, including minimum standards (section 3)
4. The BREEAM evidential requirements (section 4)
5. Assessment criteria (sections 5 - 14)
6. Appendices (A - H).
The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK New
Construction Scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to H provide additional scoping guidance for specific building and
project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check whether this is the correct BREEAM
Scheme to use for their project.
The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building’s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the
BREEAM rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section
weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and ‘credits’, including BREEAM ‘Innovation credits’,
and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating.
Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, actual building performance must be determined by
the BREEAM Assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools.
The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and
forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a
description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of building information produced
during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing
forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment.
The Assessment criteria section includes the 51 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each
issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates compliance
(using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available BREEAM credits.
The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose
which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM
issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be
achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in the section Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings).
10 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme Introduction
1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issue
forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards.
2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures/mitigates.
3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good/best practice performance level benchmark(s) and criteria. Where the
building complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM Assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM
credits can be awarded. Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where a building demonstrates that it meets
Exemplary Level Criteria, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details).
Up to a maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.
4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This
can include tables of benchmarks or building type specific performance criteria.
5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the
main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular building or
project type, e.g. shell only.
6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM
credits achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance
on how non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria.
7. Evidence: This section describes the type(s) of project information that must be provided by the design team/client and
given to the BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the building’s performance against the assessment criteria and
so justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. Section 4, the BREEAM evidential requirements provides
further guidance on evidential requirements.
8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment
criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be
of use in addressing the issue.
The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM 2014 scheme or its assessment
criteria.
1For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues may not be
applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a laboratory.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 11
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
scheme version
The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new non-
domestic buildings at the design and construction stages. ‘New Construction’ is defined as development that results in a new
standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or use for the first time upon
completion of the works.
This BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United Kingdom
only.
Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
1For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and
Education buildings.
2For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types.
12 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Scope
GP surgeries
Health centres and clinics
1The Prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks or a hybrid
of building types.
2For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential
buildings for further detail of scope
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 13
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
This is necessary as BREEAM defines differing criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building type,
function and use. Therefore to maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a separate
assessment score and rating are required for each building type function or use in the development,
Further guidance on how to define mixed-use developments for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment can be found in
Guidance Note TBC – Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units),
Further details on the application of this scheme to ’simple buildings’ can be found in Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK
New Construction simple building assessments For each individual assessment issue, guidance on ‘simple buildings’
compliance is provided in the Compliance Notes section.
14 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme Scope
version
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 15
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1. New Build Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
2. New Build Post-Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
Design Stage
The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new building’s performance at the design stage of the
life cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of operations on site. The BREEAM rating at this
stage is labelled as ‘interim’ because it does not represent the building’s final, new construction BREEAM performance.
To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is
available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the building’s performance against the criteria defined in this
Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed
design stages.
A PCR serves to confirm that the building’s ‘as built’ performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at
the interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment
and rating is required, a full post construction stage assessment can be conducted.
16 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme Scope
version
1. Existing building refurbishment and fit-out (see Appendix TBC for more information)
2. Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (refer to the BREEAM In-Use scheme)
3. Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)
4. Infrastructure projects (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 17
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
18 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
BREEAM rating benchmarks Scope
How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building is summarised on the following pages. This is
followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating.
The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2014 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are as follows:
OUTSTANDING ≥ 85
EXCELLENT ≥ 70
VERY GOOD ≥ 55
GOOD ≥ 45
PASS ≥ 30
UNCLASSIFIED < 30
The BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly
constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of new non-
domestic buildings in the UK.
In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to:
An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to meet either
the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to
achieve at least a Pass rating.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 19
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Minimum standards
To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a ‘balanced score-card’ approach to the assessment and rating of building
performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded, i.e.
non-compliance in one area can be off-set through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating.
However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not over-looked in pursuit of a particular
rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas e.g. energy, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in
mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as
levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level.
To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards,
detailed in Table - 4 below, applicable to that rating level complied with.
Man 01: Project brief None None One credit One credit One credit
and design (Stakeholder (Stakeholder (Stakeholder
consultation consultation consultation
(project delivery)) (project delivery)) (project delivery))
Ene 01: Reduction of None None None Five credits Eight credits
energy use and
carbon emissions
Ene 02: Energy None None One credit One credit One credit
monitoring (First sub-metering (First sub-metering (First sub-metering
credit) credit) credit)
Wat 01: Water None One One credit One credit Two credits
consumption credit
Wat 02: Water None Criterion Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only
monitoring 1 only
20 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Minimum standards Scope
Wst 03: Operational None None None One credit One credit
waste
LE 03: Minimising None None One credit One credit One credit
impact on existing site
ecology
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 21
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it’s supporting
procedural documents. These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built
Environment. The same ranking of impacts used in BREEAM underpins the scoring mechanisms in the BRE Green Guide to
Specification and the BRE Environmental Profiling Method for construction materials.
Table - 5 outlines the weightings for each of the nine environmental sections included in the BREEAM UK New Construction
Scheme.
Water 7% 4% 7.50%
Each of the above environmental sections consists of a differing number of assessment issues and BREEAM credits (as
described below and defined in detail in the technical sections of this Scheme Document).
22 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
BREEAM assessment issues and credits Scope
‘BREEAM credits’ are awarded where a building demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for
that issue, i.e. it has mitigated an impact or, in the case of the health and wellbeing section, addressed a specific building
occupant-related issue, e.g. good thermal comfort, daylight or acoustics.
The number of ‘credits’ available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for
a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple ‘credits’
available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building
performance are rewarded with a higher number of ‘credits’.
It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance
against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range
of embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define
overall targets, it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy
objectives for individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and
credit levels in this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs.
Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance and, in
addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices.
There are two ways in which BREEAM awards ‘innovation credits’ to recognise innovation in building design and procurement.
The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue i.e. going beyond the standard
BREEAM assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance
criteria. The second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project’s BREEAM Assessor to have a
particular building technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the
application is successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an ‘innovation credit’ can be awarded.
An additional 1% can be added to a building’s overall score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved. The maximum number of
’innovation credits’ that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for
‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building’s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be
awarded at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Inn 01 Innovation section for more detail.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 23
Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table - 6
1. For each of BREEAM’s nine environmental sections the number of ‘credits’ awarded must be determined by the BREEAM
Assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the technical sections of this document).
2. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved is then calculated for each section.
3. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting. This gives
the overall environmental section score.
4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score.
5. The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have
been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved.
6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved (up to a maximum of
10%).
Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation
24 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Calculating a building's BREEAM rating Scope
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 25
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
To maintain this consistency and credibility all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project
information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international
standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a
certification outcome is challenged.
It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a
competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that
the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All
evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produce by the assessor and made available on request
from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks.
Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and
certification. BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in a Guidance Note to be
provided on the BREEAM website.
Evidence types
Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many
instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of
demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required,
although some issues do require specific documents to be provided.
The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to
demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance with multiple criteria.
To assist project teams and the BREEAM assessor in their collation of building information at each stage of assessment, the
different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below.
26 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
1. General evidence type
2. Specific evidence type
3. Other evidence type.
For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types.
General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project. One or a
mix of these types of building information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the BREEAM issues
and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment.
General BREEAM evidence types are listed below in Table - 8, and are not specifically listed in the ’ Evidence‘ section found
within each BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the
assessor to ensure that the evidence provided demonstrates compliance.
Specific evidence is defined building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for the
BREEAM credit sought. In most cases it will be the only type of evidence capable of verifying compliance. Where specific
evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the Quality Assurance checks will identify
non-conformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would be a copy of the building regulations
output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01.
When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the ‘Evidence’ section for both final and interim
stages of assessment. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific evidence requirements.
Although the ‘Evidence’ section of each issue highlights the evidence required to demonstrate compliance with particular
criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with that criteria. Additional ‘general
evidence types’ may be required to confirm full compliance with the criteria. For example Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance
with criteria 1-5 at the design stage, a copy of the Mat 01 tool is listed in the ‘Evidence’ table. However, in addition to the Mat
01 tool, further evidence is required to demonstrate how this tool has been completed, i.e. general evidence types such as
building specifications confirming the materials to be used.
Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client/design
team is not listed in Table - 8 or the ‘Evidence’ table for each issue. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification,
undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or
better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence.
E1 As constructed Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed.
information This will comprise a mixture of ‘as-built’ information/drawings and surveys from
specialist subcontractors and the ‘final construction issue’ from design team members.
E2 Building information The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information/evidence of
model (BIM) compliance.
E3 BRE Global For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessors technical
correspondence query.
reference number
E4 BREEAM Assessor’s A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site/building to
site inspection confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor’s site inspection report will be
report distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form of evidence of
compliance in its own right, and it may include photographs taken by the assessor as
part of the survey.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 27
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
E5 Building contract(s) The contract (or excerpts/clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for the
construction of the project. In some instances, the Building Contract may contain design
duties for specialist subcontractors and/or design team members.
E6 Certificates of Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC
compliance (third (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration),
party) Considerate Constructors etc.
E8 Communication The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate
strategy effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both
informally and at information exchanges
E9 Computer aided Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing,
modelling ventilation modelling etc.
results/outputs
E11 Construction stage For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning
data/information records/reports etc.
E12 Contractual tree A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the parties
undertaking the roles required on a project.
E13 Cost information Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.
E14 Design drawings2 Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated architectural,
structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage designs.
E15 Design programme A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It is
aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative
nature of the design process, particularly in the early stages.
E16 Design A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project and
responsibility matrix when. This document sets out the extent of any performance specified design.
E17 Feasibility study Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the site or in a
1For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report.
2Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified
legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).
28 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ref Document/evidence Description/notes
type
E18 Final project brief The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept Design and any
briefing decisions made during this stage.
E19 Other third party For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data/details, manufacturers’
information literature, government /EU standards or codes, EU labelling.
E20 Professional An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing,
services contract feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice.
E21 Professional Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys/studies/test results, e.g.
specialist reports contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report, site
investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan, low and zero carbon technologies study,
transportation analysis, commissioning reports, passive design analysis report, free
cooling analysis report, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan
etc.
E22 Project Execution or The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration between the project lead and
Quality Plan lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project
team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to
develop the design.
E23 Project programme The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities
of a project.
E24 Project roles table A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages during
which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles.
E25 Project strategy The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the design and,
in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples
include strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operational,
fire engineering, building control, technology, health and safety, construction, travel plan,
sustainable procurement plan.
E26 Risk assessment The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a project and
how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for managing each risk.
E27 Schedule of services A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the project
which is incorporated into their professional services contract.
E28 Strategic or initial The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project
project brief objectives, the client’s business case and, in certain instances, in response to site
feasibility studies.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 29
BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
BRE Global Ltd endeavours to ensure that BREEAM requires only types or categories of information which already exist as a
result of the design and procurement process for a new building. This information should therefore be readily available from
the project team and easily referenced. The assessor is responsible for auditing the evidence as it is provided to them and is
not required or expected to tailor evidence; doing so is likely to result in non-conformities and a delay in certification as the
conflict of interest that may arise is investigated.
Communication records
Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the author’s identity and role, the date and
the recipient(s) identity. Formal letters of correspondence must be on company/organisation headed note-paper with a
signature (electronic signatures are acceptable). Meeting minutes must include date, location and attendee information
(names, organisations and roles), along with a record of the meeting and agreed actions.
Whilst letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and
established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity
or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be
available to confirm compliance.
30 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Management
Management
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 31
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
4 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage an integrated design process that optimises building performance.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law Courts and Major Transport Node building types only:
(criterion 7)
7. The consultation exercise used a method carried out by an independent party.
32 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 01 Project brief and design Management
To do this the Sustainability Champion must attend key project/design team meetings during the Concept Design, Developed
Design and Technical Design stages, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013, reporting during, and prior to, completion of
each stage, as a minimum.
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for
this BREEAM issue.
Sustainability Champion (design) - (1 credit)
4. Criteria 8 to 10.
Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) - (1 credit)
5. Criteria 11 to 12.
Country specific
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 33
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Minimum Minimum consultation content will be dependent on the building but would
consultation content typically include the following:
1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics)
2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building
occupants and visitors/users)
3. Management and operational implications
4. Maintenance resources implications
5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic/transport impact
6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the
community/appropriate stakeholders, if relevant/appropriate to building
type.
7. Compliance with statuary (national/local) consultation requirements.
In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes:
8. How the building/grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and
provide a range of social spaces appropriate to pupils’, students’ and other
users’ needs.
In the case of building types containing technical areas/functions, e.g. laboratories,
workshops etc., minimum content also includes:
9. The end-users broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate
sizing, optimisation and integration of equipment and systems.
CN5 Assessing and There is an additional credit for appointing a Sustainability Champion during the
awarding the construction and handover phase (see BREEAM issue Man 03 Responsible
available credits for construction practices). The key aim of the credit in Man 03 is to encourage and
a Sustainability reward contractors and project teams that appoint a Sustainability Champion and
Champion therefore ensure continuation of the sustainability objectives during the
construction phase and that the constructed building meets the client's target
BREEAM rating.
CN6 BREEAM related If, at Post Construction, the BREEAM performance targets set at the end of the
performance Concept Stage have not been achieved, the credits awarded at the interim ‘design’
targets certification stage for appointing the BREEAM Sustainability Champion must be
withheld in the final assessment. See Relevant definitions.
Methodology
None.
34 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 01 Project brief and design Management
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-3 Consultation plan setting out the process and As per interim design stage
scope of the consultation.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Communication strategy
The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as a strategy that sets out when the project team
will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various
parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges.
Consultation feedback
This is feedback which focuses on the stakeholder suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation
outcomes. This includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed
design and building operation/use.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 35
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Independent party
With respect to compliance with the criterion relating to using an 'independent party', the client/design team needs to
demonstrates that either:
1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation exercise, using a
compliant method. Examples of independent third party compliant methods include the Design Quality Indicator 1
(DQI),and the Achieving Excellence Design Evaluation Toolkit (AEDET) in Healthcare buildings. Or alternatively;
2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building e.g. the project
architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the
consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the
design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of
independence.
Key phases
The definition of key phases of project delivery includes the following:
Concept Design
Developed Design
Construction
Commissioning and Handover
In Use occupation.
1The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk
36 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 01 Project brief and design Management
Providers of schemes/qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed
under the definition of approved Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global.
Other information
None.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 37
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
4 No
Aim
To deliver whole life value from investment and promote economic sustainability by recognising and encouraging the use of
life cycle costing and service life planning to improve design, specification and through-life maintenance and operation.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
38 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Management
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Elemental life cycle cost, capital cost reporting and maintenance strategy,criteria 1
assessment criteria to 2 and 5
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
Component level LCC plan , criteria 3 to 4
Both options: The plan must include all component types to be installed by the
developer.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Appropriate The option(s) selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised
examples and critical value maximised must be appropriate in terms of its relative impact on
See criterion 4. project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area).
CN5 Pre-defined Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, the LCC
specifications plan for this specification may be used to help demonstrate compliance.
CN6 Capital cost At the design stage of assessment, where the information is not yet available, the
reporting credit can be awarded where the client commits to providing this information for
the final stage of assessment.
CN7 Law Courts When considering this issue, the term project team includes the Ministry of Justice.
buildings – Responsibility for complying with the criteria of this issue may fall with any or all of
responsibility for the project team members and it is likely that this will vary depending on the
compliance procurement route used for the project.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 39
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-2 Elemental life cycle cost plan As per interim design stage
3-4 Component level life cycle cost plan As per interim design stage
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Other information
40 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Management
the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life)
minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building’s design life
components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building.
1PD 15865:2008 Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement: a supplement to BS ISO 15686-5
Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 41
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
6 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate, responsible
and accountable manner.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split in to four parts:
42 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management
Energy consumption
9. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' energy consumption in kWh (and where
relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site
accommodation.
10. Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgCO2/project value) from the construction process via the BREEAM
scoring and reporting tool.
Water consumption
11. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' potable water consumption (m3) arising from
the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.
12. Using the collated data report the total net water consumption (m3), i.e. consumption minus any recycled water use,
from the construction process via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.
15. With reference to the considerate construction criterion 7, in addition to meeting the criteria for two credits the
contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of the compliant scheme to an exemplary level of practice.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 43
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Site Clearance The scope of this issue applies to the principal contractor and their scope of works.
If the scope of their works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of
work falls within the scope of the assessment and therefore the issue criteria.
CN5 Site timber and re- Re-usable timber formwork itself does not automatically comply. All timber used in
usable formwork the manufacture of the formwork must either be initially reclaimed, or sourced in
See criterion 9. accordance with the UK government's Timber Procurement Policy.
CN6 Target setting At present data from construction sites do not generally exist in enough detail to
set benchmarks and targets. BREEAM therefore does not set any requirements at
present in terms of specific targets for reducing energy, water and transport
consumption resulting from the construction process.
Whilst BREEAM does not require them, it is strongly recommended that site specific
targets are set and reported against.
Following adoption of widespread and consistent measurement and reporting
protocols for construction site impacts and collation of construction site data,
BREEAM is likely in future to establish consistent and complimentary targets as part
of demonstrating compliance with this BREEAM issue (see alsoAdditional
information).
44 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management
CN7 Healthcare buildings As a prerequisite of awarding any of the available credits for this issue, the principal
(NHS sites) contractor must achieve the measure requiring operation of ‘An Environmental
See criterion 1. Management System’ (as defined in criterion 1 One credit – Environmental
management).
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of
the Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment the number of BREEAM credits awarded should
therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and certified CCS score.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 45
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Construction processes
The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary for
servicing the construction and completion of a new building.
Factory gate
For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where
manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the material is in its final product form).
Examples might include:
1. Steel/concrete/glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc
2. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand
3. Concrete plant for concrete
4. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber.
Sustainability Champion
With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, a Sustainability Champion is an individual trained and
qualified to provide advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design/construction, and environmental
assessment (including BREEAM). They will monitor and audit construction site activities and facilitate the construction
team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and take the necessary action required to meet the
sustainability related performance levels required to achieve the target BREEAM rating, when the final building is
formally assessed by the BREEAM Assessor.The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an
integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and
achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this
issue focus on achieving this objective during the construction, handover and close out stages of the project.
Individuals who are accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an
approved Sustainability Champion:
BREEAM Accredited Professionals
Providers of other schemes or qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be
listed under the definition of a Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global.
Other information
46 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management
Annual. One of the key performance indicators is the ‘amount of CO2 emissions caused by the energy used during the
construction process per £100,000 of project value (kg CO2/£100k).
Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also serve
to help demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 47
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
4 Yes
Aim
To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building occupants.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into four parts:
48 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 04 Commissioning and handover Management
Compliance notes
Option1- Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core
assessment option.
Option 2- Shell and core only: With regard to the scope of services being
specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply and require assessment.
Commissioning fabric, criteria 6 to 8
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
Handover, criterion 9
Option1- Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2- Shell and core only: The guide includes as far as possible all relevant
sections regarding the services and fabric installed. On completion of works the
building owner/agent/user hands it over to the fit-out contractor who can then
complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out strategy.
Handover, criterion 10
Both options: This criterion is not applicable.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 49
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Other appropriate Appropriate standards for completion of this criteria are referenced accordingly
standards and include standards covering:
See criterion 2.
building fabric
commercial refrigeration
fume cupboards
microbiological safety cabinets.
CN6 Process related Any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project
equipment may be excluded from the assessment of the commissioning credits, except where
See criterion 2. they form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such as some heat
recovery systems.
CN7 BMS commissioning Where a BMS is specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried
procedures out:
See criterion 2. 1. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control
devices are installed, wired and functional
2. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include
physical measurements of room temperatures, off coil temperatures and
other key parameters as appropriate
3. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory
internal conditions prior to handover
4. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and
functional to user interface before handover
5. The occupier or facilities team is fully trained in the operation of the system.
Methodology
None.
50 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 04 Commissioning and handover Management
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
The content of the guide will be specific to the building type, but should include information on the following:
Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy/water/waste efficiency policy/strategy
and how users should engage with/deliver the policy/strategy.
Building services overview and access to controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control, how to
operate effectively and efficiently etc.
Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures/provisions
Provision of, and access to, shared facilities
Safety and emergency information/instructions
Building related operational procedures specific to building type/operation, e.g. laboratories.
Building related incident reporting/feedback arrangements
Building related training information/links
Provision of, and access to, transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc.
Provision of, and access to, local amenities
Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements/considerations
Links, references and relevant contact details
There is no requirement on what format the Building User Guide should take.
Complex systems
There include, but are not limited, to air conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement
ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources,
microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume
cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 51
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Other information
None
1BSRIA Commissioning Guides: Application Guide 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in Buildings Application Guide
20/95 - Commissioning of Pipework Systems Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM
1/88.1) Commissioning of Air Systems. Application procedures for buildings Application Guide 3/89.3 Pre-Commission
Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012) 3/89.3 Commissioning Water Systems application procedures for buildings
Superseded AG Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010).
Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010)
2CIBSE Commissioning Codes:
Set of Seven Codes (2003)
CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems (1996 confirmed 2006). ISBN: 9780900953736 CIBSE
Commissioning Code B: Boilers ISBN: 9781903287293
CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls ISBN: 9781903287132
CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting (SLL Commissioning Code L). ISBN: 9781903287323
CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management. ISBN: 9781903287330
CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. ISBN: 9781903287286
CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems ISBN: 9781906846152.
52 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 05 Aftercare Management
Man 05 Aftercare
Number of credits available Minimum standards
3 Yes
Aim
To provide post-handover aftercare to the building owner/occupants during the first year of occupation to ensure the
building operates and adapts, where relevant, in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split in to three parts:
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 53
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
5. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the following activities at quarterly
intervals for the first three years of building occupation:
a. Collection of occupant satisfaction, energy consumption and water consumption data.
b. Analysis of the data to check the building is performing as expected and make any necessary adjustments to
systems controls or to inform building user behaviours.
c. Setting targets for reducing water and energy consumption and monitor progress towards these.
d. Feedback any ‘lessons learned’ to the design team and developer for use in future projects.
e. Provision of the actual annual building energy, water consumption and occupant satisfaction data to BRE.
54 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 05 Aftercare Management
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Collection and This function can be coordinated/carried out by a dedicated aftercare team or,
monitoring of where the building occupier is known and able to confirm compliance based on
energy and water their existing or proposed operations for the building, the building
consumption data owner/occupier’s estates/facilities management team.
See criteria 2 and 4.
CN6 Relevant This includes the following information about the building and its performance:
information for 1. A basic description of the project and building
dissemination 2. BREEAM rating and score
See criterion 4. 3. The key innovative and low-impact design features of the building
4. Project cost
5. Project size: floor area, site area
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 55
Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN7 Provision of annual One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client/end user
energy and water to register and therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant
consumption and part of the BREEAM In-Use scheme.
occupant
satisfaction data
See criterion 4.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Complex systems
These include, but are not limited to, air conditioning, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex
passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets
and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety
cabinets.
56 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Man 05 Aftercare Management
Other information
It should be noted that the government Soft Landings programme will become compulsory for local government
developments after 2016. This is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector related projects to
link in with the work of the government’s Building Information Modelling Task Group. Further information is available from:
http://www.bimtaskgroup.org/government-soft-landings/
1The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and building performance in use, Usable Buildings Trust
(UBT), BSRIA BG 4/2009..
2BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers, BSRIA BG 28/2011.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 57
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
58 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
Aim
To ensure daylighting, artificial lighting and occupant controls are considered at the design stage to ensure best practice
visual performance and comfort for building occupants.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts:
Daylighting and glare control (up to3 credits - building type dependent)
View out (1 credit except for a healthcare building with inpatient areas, which has 2 credits available)
Internal and external lighting (1 credit)
AND
b. The use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems.
OR
b. The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as outlined
in Table - 11.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 59
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Education buildings
Healthcare buildings
Multi-residential buildings
Retail buildings
Prison buildings
60 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and
(c)} in Table - 10
All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and
definitions (c)} in Table - 10
Ref Criteria
(a) A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the relevant average
daylight factor value in Table - 9. Spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at
least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in
Table - 9.
(b) At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential
buildings, 0.7m in other buildings).
(c) The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied.
Where:
d = room depth,
w = room width,
HW = window head height from floor level,
RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room,
Note:
Table - 16gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head
heights of sidelit rooms
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 61
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should
be met.
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight illuminance Minimum daylight illuminance at
area to (averaged over entire space) worst lit point
comply
Education buildings
Pre-schools, schools, 2 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000 hours
further education - hours per year or more per year or more
occupied spaces
Healthcare buildings
Staff and public areas 2 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000 hours
hours per year or more per year or more
Occupied patient's 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 At least 300 lux for 2650 hours
areas (dayrooms, hours per year or more per year or more
wards) and
consulting rooms
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen 1 100% At least 100 lux for 3450 At least 30 lux for 3450 hours
hours per year or more per year or more
Living rooms, dining At least 100 lux for 3450 At least 30 lux for 3450 hours
rooms, studies hours per year or more per year or more
(including home
office)
Non- 80% At least 200 lux for 2650 At least 60 lux for 2650 hours
residential/communal hours per year or more per year or more
occupied spaces
Retail buildings
Sales areas 1 35% At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650 hours per
year or more
Other occupied areas 1 80% At least 200 lux for 2650 At least 60 lux for 2650 hours
hours per year or more per year or more
62 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight illuminance Minimum daylight illuminance at
area to (averaged over entire space) worst lit point
comply
Prison buildings
Cells and custody cells 1 80% At least 100 lux for 3150 N/A
hours per year or more
Internal association / 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 At least 210 lux for 2650 hours
atrium area hours per year or more per year or more
Teaching, lecture and 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000 hours
seminar spaces hours per year or more per year or more
All occupied spaces, 1 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000 hours
unless indicated in hours per year or more per year or more
Relevant definitions
Multi-residential Living rooms – (self contained flats), communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits –
buildings (sheltered housing)
All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a window or
permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of
the surrounding wall area.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 63
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
(one additional window/opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥
credit) 10m.
One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control
Internal lighting
8. All internal lighting systems are designed to avoid flicker and stroboscopic effects.
9. Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide an illuminance (lux) level appropriate to the
tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and comfort levels. This can be demonstrated through a
lighting design strategy that provides illuminance levels in accordance with the CIBSE Code for Lighting 2012 and any
other relevant industry standard.
10. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7 2 sections
3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting:
a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (manufacturers’ data for the luminaires should
be sought to confirm this).
b. For up-lighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team
calculation is usually required to demonstrate this.
c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.
External lighting
11. All external lighting located within the construction zone is designed to provide illuminance levels that enable users to
perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night. To demonstrate this, external lighting
provided is specified in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas3.
Note: the criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings.
13. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting
Guide 5 4.
14. In addition the building type criteria inTable - 13 (where relevant);
Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.
Education buildings Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher whilst teaching and on
64 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
Court buildings Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum):
1. Judge’s/magistrate’s bench
2. Dock
3. Jury area
4. Public seating area.
Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the courtroom as a whole, cater for the
following settings:
1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.)
2. Normal lighting (for court sessions)
3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio visual evidence, but allowing enough light for
note taking).
OR
b. Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table - 15.
Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.
All building types The criteria outlined in Table - 15 concerning uniformity ratio (a), view of
sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where they are used to
demonstrate compliance.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 65
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Retail
Common areas and offices (multi storey 3% 80% Where used, a minimum
buildings) point daylight factor of
1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces
with glazed roofs, such as
atria
Common areas and offices (single storey 4% 80% Where used, a minimum
buildings) point daylight factor of
1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces
with glazed roofs, such as
atria
Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance)
should be met.
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight illuminance Minimum daylight illuminance at
area to (averaged over entire space) worst lit point
comply
Multi- 1 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 hours At least 90 lux for 2650 hours
storey per year or more per year or more
buildings
Occupied
spaces
(unless
indicated
below)
66 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight illuminance Minimum daylight illuminance at
area to (averaged over entire space) worst lit point
comply
Single 80% At least 300 lux for 3000 hours At least 120 lux for 3000 hours
storey per year or more per year or more;
buildings or in spaces with glazed roofs
Occupied (such as atria),
spaces at least 210 lux for 3000 hours
(unless per year or more
indicated
below)
Prison 80% At least 300 lux for 3250 hours At least 210 lux for 3250 hours
buildings per year or more per year or more
Internal
association
or atrium
areas
Retail
Retail 1 50% At least 300 lux point daylight illuminances for 2000 hours per year or
buildings more
Sales areas
Retail 80% Select relevant criteria above for occupied spaces dependant on
buildings whether you are assessing a Multi-storey or Single-storey building.
Other
occupied
areas
The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit
rooms.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 67
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
Reflectance (RB)
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
68 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
CN2 Applicable assessment This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria
guidance relevant to the building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Percentage of assessed Where the criteria specify that a percentage of floor area must be adequately
area illuminated by daylight, this refers to the percentage of the total floor area of all
See criterion 4. the rooms that must be assessed, i.e. the compliant area. If for example, a
development has six rooms that must be assessed, each 150m2 (total area
900m2) and 80% of this floor area must meet the criterion, then 720m2 must
comply with the criterion; this is equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that
must comply must always be rounded up; therefore in this example, five rooms
must have an average daylight factor of 2% or more (plus meet the other
criteria) to achieve the credit.
CN5 Compliant forms of Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control criteria include:
glare control -curtains
building integrated measures (e.g. low eaves)
as glare control
occupant controlled devices such as blinds (where transmittance value is
< 0.1 (10%))
bio-climatic design
external shading or brise soleil
Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level
winter sun. Where using fixed systems, design studies can be used to
demonstrate that sunlight is prevented from reaching building occupants during
occupied hours.
Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria
for the glare control criteria, as they do not provide sufficient control to optimise
daylight in to the space. Furthermore, the use of curtains to control glare is likely
to cause occupants to rely more on artificial lighting.
CN6 Borrowed light For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with
daylighting criteria, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design
software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM
criteria (if the light from these sources is required in order for the room to
comply). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun
pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted
glass).
CN7 Room depth criterion - For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that
rooms lit from two can be satisfactorily illuminated by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d)
opposite sides (measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 5 The
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 69
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN8 Uniformity with The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on
rooflights rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software has to be used to calculate
the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the
whole of the space, Figure 2.36 (p.37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be
used to determine the uniformity ratio.
CN9 Daylighting - uniformity The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum
ratio Calculation daylight illuminance can exclude areas within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are
not regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although they are
included in the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance
calculations.
CN10 View of sky To comply with the view of sky criteria (ref (b)) in Table - 10, at least 80% of the
requirement room that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must receive
See criterion 4. direct light from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to
meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.
CN11 View of sky Where existing site features prevent a room from meeting the credit criterion.
requirement - The credit can still be achieved where evidence demonstrates that 90% of the
existing site features room is able to achieve the criteria.
CN12 Relevant industry Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design
standard for lighting for Schools’6
design Please note that for care homes housing people with dementia the following
standard can be used instead of the CIBSE Code for Lighting:
Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the CIBSE Code for Lighting,
2009 align with BS EN 12464-1 8.
CN13 Occupancy/workstation Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be
layout unknown zoned on the basis of 40m2 grids, i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace per
10m2.
CN14 Small spaces Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m2) which do
not require any subdivision of lighting zones/control will meet the zoning criteria
by default.
CN15 Zones of four The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a
workspaces fixed requirement. Where there is justification for this to be increased to fit with
the adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that the assessor
is satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable
zoning/control of lighting to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control
over lighting in their personable work area. The relevant design team member,
70 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
e.g. lighting consultant, should set out how this is to be achieved in such an
instance.
CN16 Lighting zoning and The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical
control - auditoria auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal
spaces lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have
lighting controls as follows:
1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.),
2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a
low level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light
for the audience to take notes),
3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the
purposes of visual demonstrations/performances),
4. Separate localised lectern lighting.
CN17 Education - Education For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been
funding agency achieved, for all relevant rooms within the building, (in accordance with Priority
requirements School Building Programme (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification:
Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013 1’) it can be
assumed that the BREEAM daylighting requirements have also been met and
therefore the two credits available for daylighting can be awarded by default. In
this instance, evidence would need to be provided to demonstrate that the EFA
requirements have been achieved.
CN18 Education (pre-schools) Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of the
and acute Special assessment, controls should be provided for the teacher/member of staff, i.e. it
Educational Needs (SEN) is not a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children.
controls for children Where nursery spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls
should be provided for the member of staff, not the nursery school children.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
1Priority School Building Programme PSBP Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education
Funding Agency, June 2013
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 71
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Clinical areas
Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental
conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc).
Computer simulation
Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the
BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Illuminance
The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux.
Occupied space
A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user.
Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and
measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here.
Patient areas
Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc)
72 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing
Public areas
Within a Healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical
functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas).
Glare control
For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users
e.g.those areas that have been designed to contain/use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls. Spaces
in the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded should not be assessed against the
glare control criteria.
View out
BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where:
1. There are or will be workstations/benches or desks for building users.
2. Close work will be undertaken or where visual aids will be used.
3. A view out is deemed to be of benefit to the building occupants e.g. in spaces where occupants are likely to spend
a significant amount of time.
Excluded areas for each of these might include:
1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward/patient area in order to enable patient observation.
2. Courtrooms and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria.
3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located centrally
within the building.
4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental/operational conditions prevents such spaces from
providing a view out.
5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or limitation
of natural light is a functional requirement e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 73
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Lighting zoning
For rooms or spaces not listed within criterion 12, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when
determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of this
BREEAM issue.
Staff areas
Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where
patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms,
physiotherapy, etc).
Uniformity
The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or
minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plan (or average daylight
factor).
Working plane
CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working
plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry.
Other information
None.
74 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing
Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification and installation of appropriate
ventilation, equipment and finishes.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Note:
The potential for natural ventilation credit does not apply to buildings on a prison development.
2. Provide fresh air in to the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation.
3. Design ventilation pathways to minimise the build-up of air pollutants in the building, as follows:
a. In air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings/spaces:
i. The building’s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart and intakes are over 20m from sources of external
pollution. OR
ii. The location of the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and external sources of pollution,
is designed in accordance with BS EN 13779:2007 1 Annex A2.
b. In naturally-ventilated buildings/spaces: openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external
pollution.
1BS EN 13779:2007 Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and room-
conditioning systems
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 75
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
4. Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as defined in BS EN
13779:2007 Annex A3.
5. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have CO or air quality sensors
2
specified and:
a. In mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces: sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide
demand-controlled ventilation to the space.
b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner or manager when
CO levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of fresh
2
air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents.
One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (post construction)
9. Criterion 1 is achieved.
10. The formaldehyde concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and is found to be less than
or equal to 100µg/averaged over 30 minutes (WHO guidelines, source BRE Digest 464 part 2 1).
11. The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and
found to be less than 300µg/over 8 hours, in line with the building regulation requirements.
12. Where VOC and formaldehyde levels are found to exceed the limits defined in criteria 10 and 11, the project team
confirms the measures that have, or will be taken, in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the levels to within these
limits.
13. The testing and measurement of the above pollutants are in accordance with the following standards where relevant:
a. BS EN ISO 16000-4: 2004 Diffusive sampling of formaldehyde in air 1
b. EN ISO 16000-6 VOCs in air by active sampling 2
c. BS EN 16017-2: 2003 VOCs - Indoor, ambient and workplace air by passive sampling 3
d. BS EN ISO 16000-3: 2001 4 formaldehyde and other carbonyls in air by pumped sampling.
14. The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m3) and TVOC (µg/m3) are reported, via the BREEAM scoring
and reporting tool.
1BRE Digest 464, VOC emissions from building products: control, evaluation and labelling schemes, Yu, C. and Crump. D, 2002
76 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing
16. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the
occupied space (see CN7 for further details).
Note: Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates
to avoid draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define ‘adequate levels of fresh air’
sufficient for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type.
Note: Multi-residential buildings with self contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of
openable window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but
must be occupant controlled.
Minimising sources of air pollution - volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products)
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:
One credit
17. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved.
18. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.06mg/m3 air in
accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17
Two credits
19. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved.
20. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.01mg/m3 air in
accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17
Manufacturer also to confirm Paint to be fungal and algal resistant in wet areas e.g.
bathrooms, kitchens, utility rooms
B Wood panels (including particle board, fibreboard including MDF, OSB, cement bonded particle board,
plywood, solid wood panel and acoustic board)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 77
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Option 2 – Compliant testing standard(s) 1. ISO 16000-9 Determination of the emission of VOC
from building products and furnishing - Emission
chamber method. OR
2. Emission testing method for California Specification
01350 (Californian Department for Public Health
CDPH) – Standard method for the testing and
evaluation of VOC emissions from indoor sources
using environmental chambers.
Note: For either method the resultant emission/surface
area obtained from the chamber test method must be
extrapolated to predict what the emissions would be in a
theoretical model room (as detailed in the standard) and
this extrapolated emission rate compared with the
required formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3.
E Resilient textile and laminated floor coverings (e.g. vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber, carpet, laminated wood
flooring)
78 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing
G Flooring adhesives
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 79
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
H Wall coverings
80 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing
(in writing or via a company product fact sheet or literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement
relevant to formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer
that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s )and therefore,
evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the assessor to demonstrate
compliance with that particular requirement.
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 81
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria
guidance relevant to the building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Furnishings The scope of the VOC credits does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving,
it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building.
CN5 Mechanically Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to
ventilated or cooled achieve this credit provided it can be demonstrated that the features required by
buildings the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g. windows fixed shut
See criteria 15 and for an air conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of
16. the potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of
providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy.
Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation
is necessary to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy
and/or peak temperature conditions) due to the function/specific usage patterns
of the building, the potential for natural ventilation credit can still be awarded
provided calculations/modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation
system will be required for ≤ 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied
space(s) for the adopted building design/layout.
CN6 VOC's - number of Where five or less products are specified within the building, the number of
products required products that needs to be assessed for VOC criteria reduces proportionally as
to comply follows:
See criterion 8.
Where five products are present, four must comply
Where four products are present, three must comply
Where three products are present, two must comply
Where two or fewer products are present, all must comply.
CN7 Levels of ventilation The two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following:
See criterion 15.
Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short-term
odours and/or prevent summertime overheating
Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for
good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy
load and the internal pollution loads of the space.
CN8 Industrial areas: air For industrial buildings the minimising sources of air pollution and adaptability
pollution/ventilation (potential for natural ventilation) criteria and credits apply only to office areas and
rate requirements not to operational areas. If the building does not contain any office areas, these
credits and their requirements do not require assessing.
CN9 Measuring the The distance requirement for air intakes and extracts does not necessarily mean the
distance. plan distance, but the three dimensional distance around and over objects; e.g. on
See criteria 3a&b. plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but
the intake may be on the roof of a 10 storey building and therefore over 20m from
the source of pollution.
82 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing
CN10 Healthcare In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be
Window openings provided with restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HTM 55,
See criteria 15 and Windows6). This is for health and safety reasons, especially where windows are
16. within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is felt that good design
can overcome these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions,
even in safety-sensitive areas.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
ClassVent
ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing ventilation openings for a natural
ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by the Department for Children, Families and
Schools (formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from
http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/docbank/index.cfm?id=9955
Clinical areas
Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Occupied spaces
See relevant definition provided in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 83
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The following building areas, where relevant to the building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied
spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria:
1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms
2. Swimming/hydrotherapy pools
3. Catering and small staff kitchens
4. Washrooms or changing areas
5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional requirement of
the space.
6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts
7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings
8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of cross
infection and/or controlled environmental conditions including:
a. Operating theatres
b. Laser surgery unit
c. Operative imaging unit
d. Intensive treatment unit
e. Infectious diseases isolation unit
f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients
g. Manufacturing pharmacy
h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit
i. Pathology containment laboratories
j. Mortuary and dissection suite
k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses
l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU)
m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units
n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air flow
would be likely with natural ventilation
o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of Healthcare Technical
Memorandums
p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational related processes.
Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation e.g. laboratories, workshops, food technology rooms must still
demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an exempted area under
this compliance note).
1SHTM03-01 ventilation for Healthcare Premises Part A: Design and Validation, Health Facilities Scotland, Feb 2013
84 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing
Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are
unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria
of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays.
Other information
Prior to measurements being taken, the ventilation and heating systems should be operating for a period of time to ensure
the relevant spaces in the building reach equilibrium in terms of their internal environmental conditions. Typically this may take
between 12-24 hours.
Examples of representative room types include: naturally ventilated carpeted office, mechanically ventilated vinyl floored
meeting room, workshop, living room or bedroom. Rooms that are not habitable or occupiable may, for example, include
toilets, store room, plant room, stairways or corridors. The definition of 'habitable or occupiable rooms' comes from
Approved Document F, Means of Ventilation, HM Government, 2010.
In accordance with the criteria, where levels are found to exceed the defined limits, the credit can only be claimed where the
project team confirms the measures that have, or will be undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and
formaldehyde levels to within the required limits.
This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM assessors on the appropriate scope of IAQ testing;
therefore it is guidance only and not a requirement of complying with BREEAM. The testing regime should be determined
based on the advice of the appropriate person appointed to conduct the testing, in order to determine and report
representative values of indoor air quality for the building.
There are a number of publications available on the issue of measuring and improving the indoor air quality in buildings
including BR 450, A protocol for the assessment of indoor air quality in homes and office buildings, Crump, Raw, Upton,
Scivyer, Hunter, Hartless. BRE (2002).
‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. The emissions of VOCs from
paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in
Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should
also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC).
Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on
health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building
product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive,
93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 85
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive
2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony,
barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides
(e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided.
Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been
summarised in BRE Digest 464. The standards outlined in Table - 17 however are the only standards recognised by BREEAM
for the purposes of assessing this issue.
BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume
cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be
trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but
higher rates may cause noise problems.
86 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Health and Wellbeing
Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the safe containment and removal of pollutants.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
1BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets, Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to the
installer and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance, BSi.
2BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 Clean rooms and associated controlled environments. Separative devices (clean air hoods,
gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments), BSi.
3PD CEN/TR 16589 Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm, BSi.
4The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010, HSE.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 87
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable This issue is not applicable to shell and core assessments.
assessment criteria Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Laboratory For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A-Level subjects,
containment device confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with Building Bulletin
requirement for 88 will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS 7989 and parts of BS 14175 may
schools, sixth form be relevant to some installations; in such cases the person or organisation
and further responsible for producing or installing the laboratory equipment should be able to
education confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard installation.
See criterion 2f.
CN5 Building specific No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Methodology
None.
88 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Health and Wellbeing
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Risk assessment
For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of any
activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used and on
the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low. Below is a list of useful resources:
1. Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education assessments can refer to CLEAPSS (www. cleapss.org.uk) for
further advice.
2. Higher Education assessments should discuss the most appropriate risk assessment with the end user of the
building.
Other information
BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume
cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be
trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but
higher rates may cause noise problems.
DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006 Fume Cupboards, Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSi.
BS EN 14175-7:2012 Fume Cupboards, Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load, BSi.
2BS 7989:2003 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, BSi.I, 2003.
3BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology. Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets, BSi.
4Building Bulletin 88: Fume Cupboards in Schools, 1988, Department for Education and Employment
5Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions, HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1, 1993.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 89
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
3 No
Aim
To ensure that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved through design, and controls are selected to maintain a
thermally comfortable environment for occupants within the building.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
1CIBSE TM52 The limits of thermal comfort: Avoiding overheating in European buildings, 2013
90 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health and Wellbeing
Compliance notes
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 91
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
CN3 Dynamic thermal For simple building assessments, dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement
modelling to achieve the credits but may be preferable as it can provide more accurate
analysis results. Note that assessment criterion 3 already clarifies use of an
alternative less complex means of modelling, which must be in accordance with
CIBSE AM11.
Country specific
CN4 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
General
CN5 Appropriate BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any
industry standard recognised collaborative industry or sector best practice standard or guidance that
See criterion 2. sets thermal performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and design
temperature can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes
of this BREEAM issue.
CIBSE Guide A (table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort
criteria (temperature ranges) for a number of specific building applications. See also
the relevant Compliance Notes below for industry standards deemed appropriate
by BREEAM for schools and healthcare buildings.
CN6 Buildings with less For buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems the thermal comfort
complex strategy need only comply with criteria 12a and b.
heating/cooling Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control
systems (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external
See criterion 3. wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). For example,
adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building
perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan
coil units.
Note: The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the
assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before
accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria.
Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in
Technology Guide CTG002 Heating control3.
92 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health and Wellbeing
CN7 Industrial Where an industrial unit contains no office space and only an operational or storage
Industrial unit with area, this BREEAM issue does not apply.
no office space
CN8 Education (schools An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of
only) school buildings. This standard includes the requirement that there should be no
Appropriate more than 120 hours when the air temperature in the classroom rises above 28 °C.
industry standards However, to comply with BREEAM (in relation to criterion 2) internal summer
and criteria for temperatures in the classroom must be significantly better than the
schools, recommendations of Building Bulletin 101, e.g. there are fewer than 60 hours a year
See criterion 2. where temperatures rise above 28 °C. This additional criteria is set to ensure closer
alignment with CIBSE Guide A, which recommends limiting the expected occurrence
of operative temperatures above 28 º C to 1% of the annual occupied period (e.g.
around 25–30 hours).
For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a
suitable alternative to an AM11 full dynamic model.
CN9 Healthcare The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum
appropriate 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Thermal comfort levels in
industry standards patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the temperature ranges set
and criteria out in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must
See criterion 2. not exceed 28 º C dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 03-
01, paragraph 2.15). Other occupied spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2
should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design.
CN10 Education and In this issue, occupant controls are intended to be for staff-use only.
prisons
occupant controls
See criterion 8.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 93
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Relevant definitions
ClassCool
A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES) which provides a
simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool may not be appropriate for other
spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing overheating will be
requiredwww.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq..
Clinical areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort
Occupied space
Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort, however for the purpose of BREEAM issue Hea 04 the definition excludes the
following:
1. Atria or concourses
2. Entrance halls or reception areas
3. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms
Passive design
Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and lighting
demand. Examples of passive design include optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and
maximise daylighting, manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and, making
effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures.
Patient areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate change
scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration of building
occupant risk/sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the minimum
94 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health and Wellbeing
requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the building services
life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is chosen for mechanically
ventilated/mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing equipment life span (before
major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant which could lead to inefficient
operation.
Thermal comfort
In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and
interpretation of thermal comfort, thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices and local
thermal comfort criteria and is ‘that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with the thermal environment.’
The term ‘thermal comfort’ describes a person’s psychological state of mind and is usually referred to in terms of
whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to define because it needs to account for
a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what makes people feel comfortable. HSE
considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number of people who should be thermally
comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage appropriate and robust consideration of
thermal comfort issues and specification of appropriate occupant controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the
space and thermal comfort for the majority of building occupants.
Other information
The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different locations
across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the PROMETHEUS project are
available at the following location:
http://emps.exeter.ac.uk/research/energy-environment/cee/projects/prometheus/
1CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998.
2CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7th Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, 2007
3CTG002 Technology Guide, Heating control: maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption, The Carbon Trust, 2006
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 95
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Aim
To ensure the building's acoustic performance including sound insulation meet the appropriate standards for its purpose.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance :
Up to three credits for Education, Healthcare, Office and Law Courts building types
1. The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the checklists
and tables section which defines criteria for the acoustic principles of:
a. Sound insulation
b. Indoor ambient noise level
c. Reverberation times
Up to three credits are available for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and ‘Other’ building types
Up to two credits
2. Where the building meets the acoustic performance standards and testing requirements detailed in Table - 22 (see
additional information) for all relevant functional areas.
OR
Up to three credits
3. Where a suitably qualified acoustician (see relevant definitions) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance
requirements for all function areas in the building using the three acoustic principles defined in criterion 1, setting out the
performance requirements for each and the testing regime required.
Up to four credits are available for Multi-residential and 'other residential institutions' building types
4. One, three orf four credits are available for multi-residential and other residential institution buildings where the relevant
criteria in the checklists and table section has been applied. Please also see CN7.
96 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
Criteria Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 2 of the Acoustic Performance Standard for the
Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June 2013 1 relating to airborne and impact sound
insulation of walls and floors.
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
requirement accordance with the APS requirements and the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of
Schools2.
Criteria Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all room types. For
roofs with a mass per unit area less than 150kg/m2 (lightweight roofs) or any roofs with glazing or
rooflights, calculations using laboratory data with ‘heavy’ rain noise excitation as defined in BS EN ISO
140-18 3 are required (in accordance with the guidance in APS) for teaching/learning spaces to
demonstrate that the reverberant sound pressure level in these rooms are not more than 25 dB
above the appropriate limits presented within Section 2 of APS, table 1.
Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater
than 150kg/m2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing or rooflights,
calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.
Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index
(STI):
Teaching and study spaces: achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for teaching and
study spaces set out within table 5 in Section 2 of APS.
Open plan teaching spaces: achieve the performance requirements relating to speech transmission
index (STI) set out within Section 2.8 of APS.
Corridor and stairwells: for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces, achieve the
performance requirements relating to sound absorption.
1Acoustic Performance Standards for the Priority Schools Building Programme, Department of Health, June 2013
2ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic Testing of Schools, version 1.2, July 2011
3BS EN ISO 140-18:2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 97
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Where this
refers to the use of building regulations, the country specific building regulations or standards can be
applied (see relevant definitions).
Criteria Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-
01:Acoustics 2013 1 determined according to the privacy requirements using both Table 3 and Table
4 from HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Impact noise is controlled at source and the weighted standardised
impact sound pressure level (L’nT,w) does not exceed 65dB in noise sensitive rooms, following the
guidance in HTM 08-01:Acoustics.
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
requirement accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
Criteria The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in Table 1 of HTM
08-01 Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise from mechanical and electrical
services in Table 2 of HTM 08-01 Acoustics are not exceeded.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
requirement the Section 7 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the
HTM 08-01 criteria demonstrates compliance.
Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index
(STI)):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
Requirement the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
98 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the
performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999 1.
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
requirement accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional
information section of this BREEAM issue.
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels given in Section
7 of BS 8233:1999.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
requirement the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlines in the Additional information section of
this BREEAM issue.
Notes Unless calculations from the suitably qualified acoustician or mechanical services engineer confirm
otherwise; the contribution to the indoor ambient noise level from mechanical services for the privacy
index should be assumed to be less than 35 dB, LAeq,T, regardless of the upper limit during the design
stage of the project. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient
targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking
system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and
in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.
Criteria Acoustic environment (control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set
out in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
Requirement the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of
this BREEAM issue.
Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with
the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010 2.
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
requirement accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where
1BS 8233: Sound Insulation and noise reduction for buildings - Code of practice, 1999
2Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), Her Majesty's Court Service (HMCS), 2010
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 99
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
applicable.
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
requirement Section 28 of the CSDG.
Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set
out in Section 28 of the CSDG.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with
requirement Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.
Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types
First credit – Sound insulation and internal indoor ambient noise levels
100 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: Installation of a specification
compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the “notes” below.
Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater
than 150kg/m2(including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing/rooflights,
calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 101
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Criteria Achieve reverberation times compliant with Section 2 of APS. In addition, or alternatively, if relevant to
the assessed building; classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture theatres achieve reverberation times
compliant with section 2 of APS.
Testing Reverberation times within teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is
requirement carried out by a compliant test body achieve the required performance standards set out in table 5 in
section 2 of APS. Measurements should be carried out in accordance with the ANC Good Practice
Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical
student listening positions in the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide,
Acoustic testing of Schools.
Corridors and stairwells: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates
compliance. Reference is also made to the 'notes' below.
Notes Where the reverberation time required by the relevant standard is not appropriate for the type of
space/building assessed, the acoustician must confirm why this is the case. In addition the acoustician
must set alternative appropriate reverberation times and provide these to demonstrate compliance.
Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions
Testing A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the normal
requirement programme of testing described in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards for every group or
sub-group of dwelling (houses, flats or rooms for residential purposes) this must demonstrate that
the performance standards detailed within this table are achieved.
OR
Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been registered with and assessed and
approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards required
for the number of credits sought (see additional information section for further information on
Robust Details).
Notes Testing should be between habitable rooms on the ground floor and at higher storey levels if
applicable. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to carry
out the number of tests specified in the appropriate Building Regulations or Standards, all of the
available suitable separating walls or floors must be tested.
See also CN7
102 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Acoustic The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the
regulations/standards assessment of the issue:
relevant
England
For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance
standards in building regulations, in England, this is referring to Approved
Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010– Resistance to the
passage of sound,
Northern Ireland
For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance
standards in building regulations, in Northern Ireland, this is referring to - DOE
Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012
Scotland
For Healthcare buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of HTM08-01,
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 103
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN4 Building types without Where a building type does not have areas 'used for speech', it does not need to
areas 'used for comply with the relevant 'reverberation times' criteria. In these instances, the credit
speech' available for reverberation can be awarded by default where the building
complies with the indoor ambient noise level and sound insulation criteria.
CN5 Remedial works Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not
meet the standards, remedial works must be carried out prior to handover and
occupation and the spaces re-tested to ensure compliance. Remedial works must
be carried out to all affected and potentially affected areas, including rooms or
spaces previously untested of a similar construction and performance
requirement. The test report, or covering correspondence, should include a clear
statement that the testing is in accordance with the required standard (where
specified) or the BREEAM criteria (see Checklists and tables and Methodology
section), and include the relevant pass/fail criteria.
CN6 Programme of testing It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness
on the day of testing. If this issue arises additional testing should be scheduled. It
may be that testing at less than the typical regime identified would be acceptable
in some instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case,
clear reasoning must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding
the credit(s).
CN7 Multi-residential or Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of ‘non-
'other residential residential’ areas such as offices, small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and
institutions' residential areas e.g. self contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes.
Rooms not covered Where less than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes ‘non-
by residential criteria residential’ areas, these areas do not need to be assessed, hence only the
1ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements, design guide, Scottish Court Service, 2011
2ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide, Scottish Court Service, 2011
104 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
The calculation for the percentage of floor area that is ‘non- residential’ should
only include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort)
covered by the 'other buildings' criteria.
Methodology
Testing, measurement and calculation procedures
Where specific guidance on testing, measurement and calculation is not stated in the criteria tables above for the relevant
building type, or within the relevant standard/guidance referenced, the following procedures can be followed by the
acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN ISO
140 series, or the successor to these standards. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO
354:2003 should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 should be followed in respect of the number
of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise, when no specific
guidance is available, the following procedures should be used:
1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise making systems) and external
sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where windows are openable as
part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the purposes of calculations and open for
measurements. If openable windows are not part of the background/permanent ventilation strategy, then these should
be assumed to be closed for the purposes of calculation and closed for measurements.
2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms/spaces of each
performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing.
4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest either
because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade.
5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising each strategy.
Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade.
6. T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and 17.00).
7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be used. In this case,
measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of normal conditions throughout the day.
8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels and may be
utilized where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should not be used.
9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the floor level and
at least 1m away from any surface.
10. Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be conducted between
one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirement category and
construction type.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 105
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
11. Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four teaching spaces
(separated from rooms above) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type.
12. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for acoustically sensitive
rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient noise levels in the absence of
construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when the building is complete, then, for
mechanical services the lower level of 35 dB, LAeq or the lowest design limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be
used.
The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance with the
performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above procedures, they
should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the
building meets the acoustic performance requirements.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
In addition;
1. Court buildings: Witness/consultation rooms and judgesor magistrates chambers and jury retiring rooms
2. Prison buildings: Care or listener suites, Official visit rooms, ‘Closed visits’ rooms
3. Educational buildings/spaces: rooms for teaching and learning i.e. classrooms, lecture theatres
4. Rooms used for public speaking or seminars
5. Any other room orspace the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy.
106 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
Habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a
reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms,
studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms.
Non-habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered a habitable room (as
defined above), it includes rooms such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms.
Occupied spaces
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 and note that for BREEAM issue Hea 05 there is a specific, unrelated, definition of
'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement, see Compliance notes for details.
Robust details
Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to pre-completion sound insulation testing
as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations
(England and Wales), DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 (Northern Ireland) and Technical Handbook Section 5 -
Noise, 2013 (Scotland). The relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance
with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the required minimum
standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and random sound insulation tests after
construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM (Multi-residential building) credits only when it
achieves a specified performance level as assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment
for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for
residential purposes or material change of use.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 107
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other
similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.
Unoccupied spaces
Where the term ‘unoccupied space’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the nature of the space for the
purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried out when the
space is unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise.
108 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing
Other information
1ISO/IEC 17024:2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 109
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
2 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage effective measures that promote safe and secure use and access to and from the building.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
1. Dedicated cycle paths provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to any cycle storage provided, without the need to
deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to offsite cycle paths (or other appropriate safe route) where these
run adjacent to the development’s site boundary.
2. Footpaths on site provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to the building entrance(s) and connect to public
footpaths off-site (where existing), providing practical and convenient access to local transport nodes and other off-site
amenities (where existing).
3. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off/adjoining to the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian
footpaths, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes.
4. Dedicated pedestrian crossings must be provided where pedestrian routes cross vehicle access routes, and
appropriate traffic calming measures must be in place to slow traffic down at these crossing points.
5. For large developments with a high number of public users or visitors, pedestrian footpaths must be signposted to
other local amenities and public transport nodes off-site (where existing).
6. The lighting for access roads, pedestrian routes and cycle lanes is compliant with the external lighting criteria defined in
Hea 01 Visual comfort, i.e. in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 1 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply:
7. Delivery areas are not directly accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist
routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public.
8. There is a dedicated parking/waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the manoeuvring area
and staff and visitor car parking.
9. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely to access
the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting.
10. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery vehicle manoeuvring area
and staff/visitor car parking (if appropriate given the building type/function).
1BS 5489-1:2013 Part 1: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013
110 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 06 Safety and security Health and Wellbeing
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 111
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN4 Development does The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the
not have any assessed building and within the boundary of the assessed development
external site areas. (regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the responsibility of the
See criteria 11, 12 future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed
and 13. building does not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from
the public highway/footpath i.e. there is no onsite vehicle access and parking areas,
then the criteria concerning safe access are not applicable. In such instances the two
available credits must be assessed and awarded based on compliance with the
security criteria.
CN5 Covered parking Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking
area, see criteria 1 to facility, and cyclists/pedestrians/delivery vehicles access the building via this area,
10 then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this area must be assessed against
those criteria.
CN6 Delivery access Criterion 7 (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for
through parking smaller sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and
areas (smaller size which is likely to mean all deliveries to the building will be made by small vans
sites/deliveries) S and not heavy goods vehicles.
See criteria 1 to 10
apart from 7
CN7 No vehicle delivery The criteria concerning vehicle delivery access is not applicable where dedicated
and manoeuvring delivery access and drop-off areas do not form part of the assessed development.
areas
See criteria 1 to 6
CN8 Prisons In the case of an assessment of a prison building/development the security criteria
Scope of security apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the
criteria for buildings secure perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison site). This could include visitor
on prison sites reception/waiting buildings, facilities/estates offices and storage and visitor/staff
parking. Security relating to secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls
outside of the scope of BREEAM.
Methodology
None.
112 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Hea 06 Safety and security Health and Wellbeing
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 113
Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Peer review
A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a
standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional
ethics.
Other information
The Metric Handbook1 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles.
In addition to the SbD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the
Department for Education and Employment (1996)2, offers guidance on how to improve the security of school premises.
1Metric handbook Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 4th Ed. 2012.
2Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and
Employment (1996)
114 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Energy
Energy
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 115
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
emissions
Number of credits available Minimum standards
12 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage buildings designed to minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and
CO2 emissions.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
3 0.225
4 0.30
5 0.375 Excellent
6 0.45
7 0.525
116 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy
8 0.60 Outstanding
9 0.675
10 0.75
11 0.825
A description of how the EPRNC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary energy
consumption and CO2 emissions is provided in the Methodology section.
Note:The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and whilst they use the same methodology
and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and, set different requirements for
regulatory compliance i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted forin the BREEAM NC 2014 Ene01 methodology through
the ‘translator curves’ defined for each country. Therefore, the EPRNC and BREEAM credits are determined by comparing the
assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which the
building is located.
1 10%
2 20%
3 50%
4 80%
5 > 100%
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 117
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Building regulations The following lists the building regulations that are used to define each country’s
for energy BREEAM ‘translator curve’ for the purpose of benchmarking building energy
performance relative to a regulatory baseline and awarding credits for this issue.
Scotland
Technical Handbook 2013 Non Domestic, Section 6 Energy
Northern Ireland
Technical Booklet F2 2012 Conservation of fuel and power in buildings other than
dwellings
England
Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new
buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition - for use in England
Wales
At the time of writing, the building regulations for Wales are under development.
The intention is to finalise the Part L Approved Documents and make the regulatory
118 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy
General
CN4 Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is being
existing buildings assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the energy
See criterion 1. modelling must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any
existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed
that will service the new extension.
The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where
this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to
consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating,
cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM assessed.
CN5 Renewable and low Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM
carbon Installations issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to off-set CO2
See criterion 2c. emissions arising from regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated
energy consumption. The LZC technology can be installed onsite,or near-site where
a private wire arrangement is in place (see Relevant definitions).
CN6 Zero carbon sources The project team must avoid double counting the energy from the zero carbon
of energy - double source. This may be particularly relevant where that source of energy generation is
counting being accounted for in terms of the assessed building’s regulated CO2 emissions
See criteria 6 and 7. and/or it will contribute to off-setting other ‘ buildings' CO2 emissions, which are not
part of this assessment.
CN7 Mixed use buildings In some instances, BREEAM assessed buildings with residential areas may have been
assessed using SAP classified under the domestic building regulations and will therefore have had their
or SAP and SBEM energy use modelled using the domestic assessment method, SAP, as well as or
See criterion 1. instead of SBEM. Further guidance on assessing a building's Ene 01 performance
where SAP is used is provided in the Other information section for this assessment
issue.
CN8 Building assessed Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and
part of a larger either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the
development amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO
2
emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy demand
compared to the total energy demand for the site.
CN9 Estimating energy At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling
demand from unregulated energy demands in a building. To demonstrate compliance with the
unregulated ‘exemplary level criteria’ the building’s modelled operational ‘regulated’ energy
building systems/ consumption is therefore used as a proxy for a building’s unregulated energy
processes demand, i.e. unregulated energy equals 100% of regulated energy. Whilst not
accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award credits for buildings
that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via onsite or near-site
renewable energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can
be accurately predicted, then this data can be used to determine the percentage of
unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources. Unregulated
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 119
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
energy demand could be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or
the same building type with the same unregulated system/process loads or by
using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54: 2013, 'Evaluating operational
energy performance of buildings at the design stage'1.
Methodology
The methodology for the EPRNC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when determining the
number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are:
These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national building
regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The percentage
improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and 'translated' into a ratio of performance for each
metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine the overall Energy Performance
Ratio (EPRNC).
The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building’s
specified/designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor using
approved building energy calculation software:
The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National Calculation
Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building regulation compliance. This
data is then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPRNC and number of credits achieved. The Ene 01
calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section.
The methodology summarised above is described in greater detail in a guidance note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
Evidence
3-5 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-2 A copy of the Building Regulations As per interim design stage, but with the output
Output Document from the approved documents from the approved software reflecting
120 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy
software. The output documents performance at the “as built” stage of analysis. This
must be based on the design stage of must account for any changes to the specification
analysis. during construction and the measured air leakage
A copy of the Building Regulations rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances (as
Output Document from the design required by building regulations).
stage SAP calculations (where relevant
for multi-residential buildings)
3-5 As above, plus: As required above and as per interim design stage.
Evidence confirming :
1. The total carbon neutral energy
generation (kWh/yr)
2. The source of the carbon neutral
energy
3. Calculated estimate of energy
consumption from unregulated
systems/process (kWh/yr)
(required only if confirming
carbon negative status).
4. Calculated estimate of exported
energy surplus (required only if
confirming carbon negative
status).
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 121
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Building regulations
Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health for
people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved and
facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside buildings. In
Scotland, they also aim to secure the welfare and convenience of persons in or about buildings and to further the
achievement of sustainable development. See CN3 for details of the relevant documents for each country.
Carbon neutral
Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions, reducing
those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes carbon emissions
from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plan and systems. See the 'zero net regulatedCO2
emissions' definition also.
122 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy
Energy demand
The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling, lighting, fan
power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the Building
Regulations Output Document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building energy uses.
Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air permeability,
glazing and shading.
Notional building
A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same
activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified properties
for the building fabric, fittings and services.
The notional building is concurrent with the national building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and
England 2013. For Scotland 2013, the ‘notional’ building is generated based upon a building designed to meet the
2002 standards and a percentage improvement is applied to define the compliant building target carbon dioxide
emission rate (TER).
Near-site LZC
A low or zero carbon source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is
most likely to be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building e.g.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 123
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected via
private wire.
Onsite LZC
A low or zero carbon source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building.
Regulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings,
including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting.
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from
systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this may include
energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators, refrigeration
systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational related equipment e.g. computers,
servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other
appliances etc.
124 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy
Other information
Allowable solutions
The term Allowable Solutions forms part of the proposed zero carbon definition. A consultation on allowable solutions is
ongoing (at the time of writing). Once an official definition of allowable solutions is confirmed by the Government for non-
domestic buildings, BRE will advise accordingly on the contribution of allowable solutions toward achieving BREEAM credits.
Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential areas
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only
The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP Data sheet from the approved software (provided by the Accredited
energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings
Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. Once converted by the Ene
01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator. This calculator will then confirm
the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved.
The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to source from
the SAP data sheet(s).
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled usingSAP and SBEM
Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it contains both
residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set from SBEM for the non-
domestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 125
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using
SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. This converted SAP data along
with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring
and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits
achieved.
Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the credits achieved
for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then added together and rounded
down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to the percentage improvement on the
building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage improvement are the totals used to determine
compliance with BREEAM’s Ene 01 minimum standards.
1CIBSE TM54: 2013, Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage
2The Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document Part L2A: The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other
than dwellings, 2013 edition, HM Government.
3National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide (for buildings other than dwellings) in England and Wales, 2010
edition (revision January 2013) www.ncm.bre.co.uk
4www.ofgem.gov.uk
126 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy
consumption.
Assessment criteria
Please note:
Compliance notes
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 127
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
CN3 Scope of sub- Dependent upon the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to
metering for simple identify which other major energy consuming systems (where present) should be
building sub-metered.
assessments
Country specific
CN4 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
criteria building type and function apply.
General
CN5 Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building services
existing buildings plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and existing
building, the criteria only apply to the extension. In this case, energy services
supplying energy consuming systems from the existing building shall, as a minimum,
be metered at the entry points to the extension, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas
and electricity. However the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that
the energy metering covers the entire building.
CN6 Lighting and small Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to cost-effectively
power separate lighting and small power. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting
and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that sub-
metering is provided for each floor plate.
CN7 Modular boiler Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole. See definition of modular
systems boiler systems in Relevant definitions .
See criterion 1,
Building specific
128 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy
CN8 Buildings situated on The systems for buildings situated on campus developments must be monitored
campus using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or
developments another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer,
See criterion 3. for monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed
building. Where energy services are supplied from an existing building on the
campus, they shall be metered at the entry points to the assessed building, e.g. hot
water, chilled water, gas and electricity. Provision of a pulsed output is not sufficient
to award the credit for these building types.
CN9 Small office, For a development consisting of a number of small units a single meter per unit is
industrial or retail sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each unit do not need to be
units sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small unit is defined as <
See criterion 3. 200m2.
CN10 Large office, For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. > 200m2), sufficient
industrial or retail sub metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or
units departments within the unit must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as
See criterion 3 a whole.
CN12 Single occupant The lists below summarise the commonly found functions by building types. These
buildings: relevant lists are not exhaustive and where other areas/departments exist, these should also
function be separately metered.
areas/departments
See criterion 3.
CN16 Education buildings 1. Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms)
2. Computer suites
3. Workshops
4. Lecture halls
5. Conference rooms
6. Drama studio
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 129
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
7. Swimming pool
8. Sports hall
9. Process areas
10. Laboratories
11. High containment suites within laboratories
12. Controlled environment chambers
13. Animal accommodation areas
14. Data centres
15. IT work and study rooms, including IT equipped library space and any space
with provision of more than one computer terminal per 5m2.
Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required.
CN18 Other buildings Other types of single occupant buildings should use the above lists of function
See criterion 3. areas as a guide to the level of provision required to comply, bearing in mind the
aim of the credit is to encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that
facilitates the monitoring of in-use energy consumption (in this case by area).
Methodology
None
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
130 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Accessible meters
Energy meters located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and
readings by the building occupant/facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution room or
control room (where a BEMS is installed).
Common areas
Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common facilities
and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically
managed and maintained by the development’s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common
areas include an atrium, stairwells, main entrance foyers/reception and external areas e.g. parking.
Energy supply
All types of energy supplied to a building area (department/tenancy/unit) within the boundary of the assessed
development; including electricity, gas, heat or other form of energy/fuel which is consumed as a result of the use of,
and operations within, each relevant area.
Energy meters
Energy meters measure the amount of energy used on a circuit where energy is flowing. Primary meters measure the
main incoming energy and are used for billing by the utility supplier. They include the principal smart and advanced
utility meters to a site for electricity and gas.
Sub-meters are the second tier including heat and steam meters and secondary meters installed to measure
consumption by specific items of plant or equipment or to discrete physical areas, e.g. individual buildings; floors in a
multi-storey building, tenanted areas, function areas.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 131
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Other information
Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is available in
CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering.
132 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 03 External lighting Energy
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient light fittings for external areas of the development.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit
1. The building has been designed to operate without the need for external lighting (which includes on the building, signs
and at entrances).
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. The average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings within the construction zone is not less than 60 luminaire
lumens per circuit Watt.
3. All external light fittings are automatically controlled for prevention of operation during daylight hours and presence
detection in areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic.
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply. Typically external lighting will be specified and installed by the developer.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 133
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
criteria building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Single building Where the building being assessed forms part of a larger development (or is an
assessments on extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other buildings, the
larger scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting
developmentsor within the construction zone of the assessed building.
campuses and
extensions to
existing buildings
CN5 Temporary lighting, Temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations, where
decorative lighting specified, can be excluded from assessment under this issue. Decorative lighting
and floodlighting and floodlighting must however not be exempt from the assessment criteria.
CN6 Prisons and other The criteria are concerned only with general external lighting e.g. way-finding, car
secured buildings parking, decorative, signage, landscape, storage areas etc. Lighting specified for
security lighting specific security purposes within secured buildings, such as prisons, can be excluded
from assessment under this issue.
Methodology
Average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings
The individual luminous fluxes of all luminaires within the construction zone are summed (in lumens), then divided by the total
circuit Watts for all the luminaires.
For lamps other than LED lamps, the luminous flux of a luminaire using those lamps can be determined by multiplying the sum
of the luminous fluxes produced by all the lamps in the luminaire by the light output ratio of the luminaire (as confirmed by the
luminaire manufacturer).
Note: LED lamps are typically integral to the luminaire (LED luminaires). As such, the manufacturers' literature will
encompass both lamp and luminaire as a whole.
134 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 03 External lighting Energy
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Automatic control
An automatic external lighting control system that prevents operation during daylight hours through either time
switch or daylight sensor (a manually switched lighting circuit with daylight sensor or time switch override is also
acceptable) in addition to providing presence detection in areas of intermittent traffic.
Note: for external lighting not fitted with presence detectors, time switches must provide automatic switch-off of
lighting after a specified curfew hour - except in cases where there is a specific requirement for lighting to be left on all
night.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-
assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Daylight sensor
A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn.
Presence detector
A sensor that can turn lighting on when a presence is detected in the scanned area, and off after a pre-set time when
no presence is detected. Presence detectors must be compatible with the lamp type used as very frequent switching
can reduce the life of some lamp types.
Time switch
A switch with an in-built clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times.
Other information
None.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 135
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
3 No
Aim
To encourage the adoption of design measures, which reduce building energy consumption and associated carbon
emissions and minimise reliance on active building services systems.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Passive design
136 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
However, note that onsite LZC technologies are only eligible to contribute to
meeting the criteriaof this issue where the proposed solution can be classified as a
microgeneration technology. The requirements for classification as a
microgeneration technology must be met as described in Compliance note CN8
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 137
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN4 Passive design As a minimum, the passive design analysis should cover:
analysis 1. Site location
See criterion 2. 2. Site weather
3. Microclimate
4. Building layout
5. Building orientation
6. Building form
7. Building fabric
8. Thermal mass or other fabric thermal storage
9. Building occupancy type
10. Daylighting strategy
11. Ventilation strategy
12. Adaptation to climate change.
CN5 Free cooling analysis The free cooling analysis should demonstrate consideration of appropriate
See criterion 5. technologies from the following :
1. Night-time cooling (requires fabric to have a high exposed thermal mass)
2. Ground coupled air cooling
3. Displacement ventilation (not linked to any active cooling system)
4. Ground water cooling
5. Surface water cooling
6. Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect
7. Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat
8. Absorption cooling, using waste heat.
CN6 LZC feasibility study The LZC study should cover as a minimum:
See criterion 6. 1. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year
2. Life cycle cost of the potential specification, accounting for payback
3. Local planning criteria, including land use and noise
4. Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system
5. Any available grants
6. All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the
development.
7. Reasons for excluding other technologies
8. Where appropriate to the building type, connecting the proposed building to
an existing local community CHP system or source of waste heat or power OR
specifying a building/site CHP system or source of waste heat or power with
the potential to export excess heat or power via a local community energy
scheme.
CN7 LZC feasibility study When undertaking a feasibility study at a stage later than concept design (RIBA
timing. See criteria 6. stage 2 or equivalent), an additional element would need to be included in the
report to highlight the local LZC energy sources which had been discounted due to
the constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for
their omission. If the feasibility study discounted all local LZC as unfeasible due to the
late stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit for the
feasibility study must be withheld.
If the feasibility study were commissioned at the concept design stage or earlier
and in the unlikely event the study concluded that the specification of any local LZC
technology were unfeasible, the LZC credit could still be awarded.
138 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy
CN8 Recognised local Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the requirements of this issue must
LZC technologies produce energy from renewable sources and meet all other ancillary requirements
See criterion 6. as defined by Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council
of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources
and amending and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and
2003/30/EC (www.eur-lex.europa.eu/en).
The following requirements must also be met:
1. There must be a direct supply of energy produced to the building under
assessment.
2. Where covered by the Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS),
technologies under 50kWe or 45kWth must be MCS (or equivalent) certified
products installed by MCS (or equivalent) certified installers.
3. Combined heat and power (CHP) schemes above 50kWe must be certified
under the CHPQA standard.
CHP schemes fuelled by mains gas are eligible to contribute to performance
against this issue.
4. Air source heat pumps can only be considered as a renewable technology
when used in heating mode. Refer to Annex VI of Directive 2009/28/EC for
more detail on accounting for energy from heat pumps.
5. Where MCS or CHPQA certification is not available, the design team must
investigate the availability of alternative accreditation schemes in line with the
Directives listed above, or an equivalent country/regional directive or
standard. Where an accreditation scheme exists it should be used for the
purpose of verifying compliance of the specified LZC technology. If no
accreditation scheme exists in the country the design team must demonstrate
they have investigated the competence of the installer selected to install the
LZC technology and are confident that they have the skill and competence to
install the technology appropriately.
CN9 LZC technologies The carbon emissions savings from these LZC technologies must also be
recognised by demonstrated using the approved building energy modelling software. This
approved software currently includes solar thermal energy systems, photovoltaic systems, wind
turbines, biomass boilers, CHP and heat pumps. It does not currently include grey
water heat recovery or earth ducts (see ).
CN10 Novel LZC Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are
technology not not currently included as LZC technologies in any of the approved building energy
listed calculation software packages. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the
See criterion 6. system proposed and the carbon benefits achieved. The BREEAM Assessor must
confirm acceptability with BRE before an assessment is submitted. The calculation
procedure for the new LZC technology should be submitted for consideration as a
'novel technology' to be included in the 'SBEM-Q' innovation process (see Other
information). The novel technology would only be acceptable for the LZC credit if
either:
a. It is already demonstrably modelled in one of the approved dynamic
simulation compliance tools;
b. The calculation procedure has been accepted by the SBEM-Q process and
integrated into the SBEM tool;
or
c. It has been applied for and is in the process of being accepted for SBEM-Q.
For one-off LZC technology designs, where it is not viable to obtain SBEM-Q
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 139
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
approval, a BREEAM innovation credit can be applied for and subject to approval,
obtained instead.
CN11 Waste heat from a Waste heat from an operational process that takes place within the assessed
building- related building (or on the assessed site) can be considered as ‘low carbon’ for the purpose
operational process of this BREEAM issue. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from
See criterion 6. the process is integral to the assessed building. Examples of operational processes
and functions include manufacturing processes, high temperature oven/kiln,
compressors serving process plant, micro-brewery, crematorium, testing and
commissioning boilers for training or manufacture and data centres. It does not
include waste heat from IT or server rooms, which could be used as part of
conventional heat recovery measures.
CN12 Community and ‘Local’ does not have to mean onsite; community schemes (near-site) can be used
near-site schemes as a means of demonstrating compliance, as this BREEAM issue seeks to encourage
See criterion 6. the installation of onsite and near-site LZC technologies.
CN13 Waste incineration Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as low carbon for the
See criterion 6. purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances:
1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the
feasibility study and; EITHER
2. The local authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is
demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste
management policies; OR
3. A near or onsite facility connected to the building, via a private wire
arrangement, which is demonstrably removing re-usable and recyclable
waste material prior to incineration.
CN14 First generation Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food
biofuels production and greenhouse gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability
See criterion 6. between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems
fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstocks, e.g. biofuels
manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. where these are grown or
farmed for the purposes of biofuel production. Subject to review against the
criteria set out in the Compliance notesbelow, BREEAM may recognise systems
using second generation biofuels (see Relevant definitions) or biofuels
manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, waste vegetable
oil or locally and sustainably-sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets,
where these are not interchangeable with fossil fuels or first generation biofuels.
CN15 Second generation BREEAM recognises that biofuels produced from biomass which is a by-product of
biofuels and other processes may provide a more sustainable alternative to fossil fuels. Typically,
biofuels from waste these use waste feedstock consisting of residual non-food parts of current food
streams See crops, industry waste such as woodchips, other waste vegetable matter and waste
criterion 6. fish oil from sustainable fish stocks to produce biofuel. Such biofuels will, in principle
be recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of defining low/zero carbon
technologies. However due to the emerging nature of such technologies, full details
would be required for review by BRE Global prior to confirmation of acceptability.
Matters which would be required for consideration include the following:
1. Type, provenance and sustainability of the biomass feedstock
140 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy
Building specific
CN16 Schools: information With respect to the free cooling credit, it is possible for ICT classrooms to be
communication designed to avoid the use of mechanical cooling. Hence, they are not exempt from
technology (ICT) the requirements of this issue i.e. if mechanical cooling were used to treat these
classrooms spaces; it would not be possible to achieve the free cooling credit within this
BREEAM issue.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
4-7 Results from a dynamic simulation model As per interim design stage
demonstrating the feasibility of the free
cooling strategy and meeting the first credit
of Hea 03.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 141
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Energy specialist
An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments,
designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector and is not professionally
connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer.
Free cooling
The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the need to rely on energy-
consuming mechanical cooling. Free cooling is an enhanced passive design method that requires engineering design
and modelling to demonstrate its effectiveness. Other similar methods include enhanced passive ventilation and
enhanced daylighting.
Near-site LZC
Refer to BREEAM issueEne 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Onsite LZC
Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Payback period
The period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment.
Other information
142 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy
renewable sources, cogeneration, district heating and cooling and heat pumps (Article 6).
This requirement has been included in the building regulations for England (amendment Regulation 25A, 2013) and
Scotland (October 2013) and it has been proposed for the forthcoming regulations in Wales, expected in July 2014.
The LZC feasibility study in BREEAM is intended to encourage the study to be done early in the project, not just before
construction starts, so that the most appropriate solutions can be adopted. Also, this credit does not permit
technologies that are not best practice/sustainable or cannot be modelled with a robust method.
1Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations – Energy, 2007.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 143
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
2 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy efficient refrigeration systems, therefore reducing operational
greenhouse gas emissions resulting from the system's energy use.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
With reference to The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map 3, this can be demonstrated through specification of
technologies described in CO2 emissions saving options available when designing a new store/retail concept that deliver
savings in comparison with the 'baseline' building. Refer to the Methodology section for further information.
Note: For non-retail building types with cold storage refrigeration systems, refer to compliance note CN5.
144 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Energy
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
assessment criteria option.
Option 2 – Shell and core only: Where cold storage systems are specified/installed,
all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Scope of this This issue is applicable only in instances where commercial/industrial sized
BREEAM issue refrigeration and storage systems are specified, for example:
1. Storage and refrigeration of food in supermarkets
2. Cold storage facilities in industrial, laboratory, healthcare and other buildings.
The criteria do not apply where only domestic-scale refrigeration is to be installed;
this type of installation is covered within BREEAM issue Ene 08 Energy efficient
equipment.
If the building does not contain commercial/industrial sized refrigeration system(s),
this issue is not applicable to the assessment.
CN5 Non retail buildings The Carbon Trust’s Refrigeration Road Map introduces the main energy saving
and the Carbon opportunities for refrigeration use in the retail sector and defines a ‘baseline
Trust Refrigeration supermarket’. However, many of the technologies outlined in the Road Map are
Road Map Action appropriate to non-food applications and therefore non-retail building types that
Plan specify or install cold storage systems.
See criteria 3 and 4. If the ‘baseline supermarket’ does not provide an appropriate benchmark for
achieving the second and third credit, the design team can still comply with the
criteria by demonstrating a reduction in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2
eq.) against an alternative baseline. The design team must confirm details of the
alternative baseline system used, and that it is based on a typical
installation/technology for that building type. The systems being compared must
have the same duty and service conditions and include the relevant consumption
from the refrigeration systems ancillary equipment.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 145
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN6 Components on the Where specified as part of the refrigeration system, products used for the
ECA Energy following components must be listed on the ECA Energy Technology Product List
Technology Product (or equivalent list):
List 1. Air cooled condensing units
See criterion 1b. 2. Automatic air purgers
3. Cellar cooling equipment
4. Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage)
5. Curtains, blinds, sliding doors and covers for refrigerated display cabinets
6. Evaporative condensers
7. Forced air pre-coolers
8. Refrigerated display cabinets
9. Refrigeration compressors
10. Refrigeration system controls.
CN7 Extensions to If the assessed building is an extension to an existing building and there is cold
existing buildings storage plant in the existing building that will serve the new extension, then this
plant must meet the criteria in order to achieve any available credits.
Methodology
Calculating indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO eq.)
2
The indirect emissions must be calculated in accordance with the procedures in BS EN 378-1 4, Refrigerating system and heat
pumps safety and environmental requirements, Annex B (total equivalent warming impact (TEWI)). Further detail on applying
this method to calculate the indirect emissions is available in the Guideline methods of calculating TEWI5 (total equivalent
warming impact) published by the British Refrigeration Association (BRA).
Calculations must be carried out by an appropriately qualified professional (e.g. a building services engineer), including
justifications for assumptions and methodologies for savings in indirect greenhouse emissions.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
2 and 3 Written confirmation that the refrigeration Refrigeration plant commissioning record
plant will be commissioned and who is
responsible
146 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Energy
4 Documentary evidence confirming the type As per interim design stage plus confirmation
of technology specified and estimated of installed technology.
savings in indirect greenhouse emissions,
including a description of how this saving is
achieved.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Other information
1Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector, Carbon Trust, British Refrigeration Association,
Institute of Refrigeration (June 2011).
2Energy Technology List https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html
3Refrigeration Road Map – An action plan for the retail sector, Carbon Trust, CTG021,2012
(http://www.carbontrust.com/resources/guides)
4BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI.
5Guideline methods of calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification, British Refrigeration Association.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 147
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
3 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient transportation systems.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
1. Where either lifts, escalators or moving walks (transportation types) are specified:
a. An analysis of the transportation demand and usage patterns for the building has been carried out to determine the
optimum number and size of lifts (including counter-balancing ratio), escalators and/or moving walks.
b. The energy consumption has been estimated in accordance with ISO BS EN 25745 Part 2 - Lifts and/or Part 3 -
Escalators and Travelling Walkways for one of the following:
i. At least two types of system (for each transportation type required); OR
ii. An arrangement of systems (e.g. for lifts, hydraulic, traction, machine room-less lift (MRL)); OR
iii. A system strategy which is ‘fit for purpose’.
c. The transportation system with the lowest energy consumption is specified.
2. Criterion 1 is achieved.
3. For lifts, the following three energy-efficient features are specified:
a. The lifts operate in a stand-by condition during off-peak periods. For example the power side of the lift controller
and other operating equipment such as lift car lighting, user displays and ventilation fans switch off when the lift has
been idle for a prescribed length of time.
b. The lift car lighting and display lighting provides an average lamp efficacy, (across all fittings in the car) of > 55 lamp
lumens/circuit Watt and lighting switches off after the lift has been idle for a prescribed length of time.
c. The lift uses a drive controller capable of variable-speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF) control of
the drive motor.
4. For escalators and/or moving walks, each escalator and/or moving walk complies with at least one of the following:
a. It is fitted with a load sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable
speed drive; OR
b. It is fitted with a passenger sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in stand-
by mode when there is no passenger demand.
148 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Energy
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Scope of this issue The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair
stairlift/platform(s) or other similar facilities to aid persons with impaired mobility.
However, any lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be
assessed inclusive of goods and vehicle, passenger lifts. A demonstration of
compliance to the BREEAM criteria relating to the excluded transportation types
would be considered best practice for an energy efficient system (despite not
being required for the purpose of awarding the available credits).
CN5 Transport analysis The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift
selection for the following conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise
building for the purpose of DDA compliance/disabled access only; or where a
goods lift is selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry.
CN6 Building has no lifts, This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or
escalators or moving walks.
moving walks
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 149
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN7 Regenerative drives This credit can only be awarded where the regenerative drive produces an energy
See criterion 6. saving greater than the additional stand-by energy used by regenerative drives.
Regenerative drives will typically be appropriate for high travel and high intensity
usage lifts.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Counterbalancing ratio
Traction lifts use a counterweight to balance the weight of the car plus a proportion of the rated load. This results in
the drive motor being sized only to raise or lower approximately half the rated load. Lowering the counterbalancing
ratio means a smaller motor and controlling drive unit are required, thus saving energy. Hydraulic lifts may use a
balance weight to balance out a proportion of the weight of the car; this reduces the size of the drive motor required
for the lift.
Standby condition
A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and has reduced the power consumption to the minimum level set for
that particular lift and terminates at the next traffic demand (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012). The period between
when the lift was last used and when standby condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO 25745-1 as 5 minutes
Idle condition
A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO
25745-1: 2012).
150 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Energy
Other information
Part 1 was published in October 2012. A draft of Part 2, ISO/DIS 25745-2:2013-06, was published for review in July 2013.
The review end date was in October 2013. Part 3 is under development. Parts 2 and 3 are expected to be published in 2014.
It has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed to the operation of
lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributable to standby mode in many situations. ISO 25745 Parts 2 and 3 are being
prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support the efficient and effective use of energy,
providing:
1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts.
2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts.
3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and energy
classification systems.
Counterbalancing
Lifts have a specified rated load and as such the counterbalancing ratio will be set accordingly (see Relevant definitions).
Provided the type, number of lifts and the rated lift load specified is based on an appropriate analysis of the
transportation/lift passenger demand and traction required for the building, then the counterbalancing ratio can be
considered optimised for the purposes of compliance with BREEAM.
Counterbalancing ratios are normally provided in the range of 40-50% for safety reasons. Any other values should be
carefully considered. Reduced load balancing increases the maximum power and torque required to be delivered by the
hoisting motor and so may increase the size of motor selected; although the average hoisting power and energy
consumption will be reduced.
A detailed engineering analysis of the rope traction, hoisting motor and its drive performance and electromechanical braking
capacity under rated and reduced load conditions should be carried out, to ensure safe traction and braking capacity.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 151
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Aim
To recognise and encourage laboratory areas that are designed to be energy efficient and minimise the CO2 emissions
associated with their operational energy consumption.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts:
Pre-requisite
Design specification (1 credit)
Best practice energy efficient measures (upto 4 credits) - building type dependent.
Pre-Requisite
1. Criterion 1 within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories (Risk Assessment) has been achieved.
Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to buildings containing
these facilities)
4. Specification of fume cupboards and other containment devices has been carried out in compliance with criteria 2 and 3
of issue Hea 03 Indoor air quality - laboratories, as appropriate to the containment device specification.
5. Where ducted fume cupboards are specified:
a. Compliance with item A) in Table - 26.
b. The measurement of volume flow rate should be taken in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to
take account of reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage.
c. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and therefore does not increase the
health and safety risk to future building occupants.
152 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy
6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved (or criteria 1-4 where ducted fume cupboards are not specified).
7. Laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed to promote energy efficiency, demonstrated
through compliance with items B to L in Table - 26 (see (a) and (b) below for how credits are awarded).
a. Up to 2 credits: The laboratory area (see Relevant definitions) accounts for at least 10% (but less than 25%) of the
total building floor area; OR
b. Up to 4 credits: The laboratory area accounts for 25% or more of the total building floor area.
8. To achieve credits for energy efficient measures, the chosen measure(s) must have a reasonably significant effect on the
total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater. This must be demonstrated by calculations or
modelling.
9. The energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance criteria, and therefore do not
increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.
A Fume cupboard reduced volume flow rates An average design air flow rate in the fume 1
cupboards specified no greater than
0.16m3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of
fume cupboard workspace.
Additional Items
Laboratory System
Best practice specific fan power (W/L/s)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 153
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
C Fume cupboard volume flow rates (further An average design air flow rate of < 0.5
reduction) 0.12m3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of
fume cupboard workspace
D Grouping and/or isolation of high Minimisation of room air change rates and 0.5
filtration/ventilation activities overall facility ventilation flows by grouping
together or isolating activities and equipment
with high filtration or ventilation
requirements.
E Energy recovery - heat Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there 0.5
is no risk of cross-contamination) or via
refrigerant or water cooling systems.
F Energy recovery – cooling Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat 0.5
exchangers (where there is no risk of cross-
contamination) or via refrigerant or water
cooling systems.
L Room air changes rates Reducing air change rates by matching 0.5
ventilation airflows to environmental needs
and demands of containment devices.
1. Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items C to L (above) the laboratory
must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits are achieved
this would need to be rounded down to three credits.
154 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy
Compliance Notes
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Scope of this This issue is applicable only to Further Education, Higher Education and Other
BREEAM issue Research and Development facilities that contain laboratory space and
containment devices and/or areas.
This issue is not applicable for School buildings (primary and secondary level). The
laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories and
guidance within Building Bulletin 88 should be followed for assessing laboratories
and containment devices in these building types. Where there are a large number of
containment devices (such as fume cupboards) present in a School or Sixth Form
assessment, BRE should be contacted for further guidance.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 155
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Laboratory Areas
Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/humidity/containment controlled) spaces
where physical/biological or chemical processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have an inherently high
energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health and safety
standards, typically laboratories:
1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets)
2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air
3. Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply or
emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments.
Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any laboratory
support areas such as:
1. Write up/offices
2. Meeting rooms
3. Storage
4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements.
Teaching and other laboratories/workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment devices
and/or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide evidence
that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process related activities.
Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table 1 in CIBSE TM46 1 Energy Benchmarks.Typically, in buildings
where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the
BREEAM definition.
Different types of laboratories have different requirements for HVAC, plug load equipment and access. This can lead
to enormous variations in energy and water requirements.The main types of laboratories include:
1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed
requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. Typically includes chemical science laboratories.
These laboratories require specially designed facilities.
2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped services.
Typically includes engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and humidity
control, dust control, and clean power.
3. Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. Typically require higher levels of
primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialized ventilation systems to ensure
directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from exhaust air, controlled access
zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules to isolate the laboratory.
4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora and
fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over the
facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent the possibility of
infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours.
5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment, storage space
for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs.
6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent
contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and production
needs. Typically used in UK universities for Nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical research/studies and
microelectronics applications.
Right-Sizing
Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment is
sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on ‘rated’ data obtained from manufacturers’
literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to life
cycle cost benefits, whilst taking account for the need for appropriate contingency.
156 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy
Other information
Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas/buildings that are not
currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, used to assess and award credits in Ene01 Reduction of
CO Emissions.
2
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 157
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
2 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage procurement of energy-efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy
savings in operation.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance.
Two credits
1. Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads and, for each estimate or model, its contribution to the total
unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical/standard specification.
2. Identify the systems and/or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated energy demand of the
development and its operation and demonstrate, through either good practice design or specification, a meaningful
reduction in the total unregulated energy demand of the building.
Table - 27 contains solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for common examples of significant contributors to unregulated
energy demand for a number of different building types/functions.
A Small power, The following equipment has been awarded an Energy Star 1 rating OR has been
plug in equipment procured in accordance with the Government Buying Standards2
1. Office equipment
2. Other small powered equipment
3. Supplementary electric heating.
For domestic scale white goods, the criteria in Ref F Residential areas apply.
B Swimming pool 1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or ‘liquid’ pool covers with an
automatic dosing system, are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and
Jacuzzis (if relevant).
2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended.
3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be controlled so that it is 1 °C
above the water temperature.
158 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Energy
C Communal laundry At least one of the following can be demonstrated for commercial sized appliances:
facilities with 1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water
commercial sized 2. Use of water sourced from a rain water collection tank(s).
appliances
D Data centres 1. Design is in accordance with the ‘Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on
Data Centres’3 principles with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected
minimum practice’ level (as defined in the Code of Conduct).
2. Temperature set points are not less than 24°C, as measured at the inlet of the
equipment in the rack.
E IT-intensive 1. Uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard, with forced
operating areas ventilation only to be used when the internal temperature exceeds 20 o C and
active cooling only when the internal temperature exceeds 22 o C.
2. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not
in use, including overnight.
F Residential areas Domestic scale appliances have the following ratings (or better) under the EU Energy
with domestic scale Efficiency Labelling Scheme, where provided:
appliances 1. Fridges, fridge freezers: A+ rating
(individual and 2. Washing machines: A++ rating
communal facilities) 3. Dishwashers: A+ rating
4. Washer-dryers and tumble dryers: A rating.
OR
5. If any of the appliances will be purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner,
information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods
must be provided to the residential areas of the building.
Note:
1. Any white goods available to purchase from the developer must be compliant
with criteria F1 to F4 above.
2. If criterion F5 were chosen to demonstrate compliance, only one of the two
available credits could be awarded.
G Healthcare The procurement of large scale equipment (where present, see compliance note
CN3) and sets of electrical equipment (where numbering more than 50) has been
informed and selected by life cycle costing analysis for at least two options in
accordance with HTM07-02, Chapter 3.0 4
H Kitchen and catering The project has incorporated all of the energy efficiency measures (except as specified)
facilities outlined in each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide TM50 5 :
1. Section 8 (Drainage and kitchen waste removal)
2. Section 9 (Energy controls - specifically controls relevant to appliances)
3. Section 11 (Appliance specification - not fabrication or utensil specifications)
4. Section 12 (Refrigeration)
5. Section 13 (Warewashing: dishwashers and glasswashers)
6. Section 14 (Cooking appliance selection)
7. Section 15 (Water temperatures, taps, faucets and water saving controls).
Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities should be assessed here, not in Ene 05
Energy efficient cold storage.
Energy efficient white goods scheme and equivalent rating scheme (Category reference F)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 159
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Energy rating certifications other than the EU labelling scheme will be accepted, providing the energy efficiency
performance is equivalent to the EU labelling scheme. This can be any internationally recognised energy efficiency labelling
scheme for white goods or a national scheme developed for use in the country of assessment, for example Energy Label
(in EU), Energy Star (in USA), The Appliance Energy Rating Scheme (in Australia), etc. A statement confirming that the
scheme is nationally recognised and can be regarded as equivalent to the EU labelling scheme is required for use.
Large-scale equipment in healthcare (Category reference G)
This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment, and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in
excess of 10kW rated input power. All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria.
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable
assessment criteria 1. Criteria 1 and 2 apply excluding ‘Ref B Swimming pool’ from Table - 27 which is
not applicable.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Refrigeration The criteria in ‘Ref A Small power, plug in equipment’ inChecklists and tables apply to
equipment the following refrigeration equipment (where present):
1. Air cooled condensing units
2. Cellar cooling
3. Commercial service cabinets
4. Curtains/blinds for refrigerated display cabinets
5. Refrigeration compressors
6. Refrigeration system controls
7. Refrigerated display cabinets.
CN5 A meaningful BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction
reduction in in unregulated energy demand. The project team must justify how they have
unregulated energy determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated energy
demand demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification.
160 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Energy
CN6 Cold storage The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other
commercial or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems. These systems
are covered within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storageBREEAM Ene 05
and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN7 Lifts, escalators and This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems
moving walks are covered within the scope of Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems and
should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN8 Laboratory systems This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are
covered within the scope of Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems and should
be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN9 Reuse of equipment Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most
energy efficient option. However, the credit could be awarded if either of the
following criteria are demonstrated:
1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the
Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme Energy Technology Product List 1.
2. Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more
energy-efficient option than specifying new equipment.
Building specific
CN10 Large-scale This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other
equipment in equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power,
Healthcare See including equipment used for medical purposes.
criterion 1 and Ref G
Methodology
None
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 161
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Data centre
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which contain
enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and may provide
some form of data service (e.g. large scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in
office buildings).
IT-intensive areas
These include computer areas where more than 1 PC per 5m2 is provided, e.g. training suites, design studios, libraries’
IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices.
Office equipment
Computer monitors, desktop computers, scanners, photocopiers, printers, workstations etc.
Regulated energy
Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from
systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include energy
consumption from operational related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile fume
cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of
emissions, for this issue, it does not include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its
operation, e.g. commercial/industrial refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transportation systems; and
ducted fume cupboards; because they are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene 07
respectively.
Other information
None
162 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 09 Drying space Energy
1 No
Aim
To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit
1. For self-contained dwellings: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of
holding:
a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line
b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line.
AND/OR
2. Individual bedrooms: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding:
a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms; plus
b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold.
AND
Compliance notes
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 163
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Multi-residential For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for
developments with Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies:
CSH assessed Where CSH issue Ene 4 has been achieved for all dwellings assessed under the CSH,
dwellings the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also met. If this is
See criterion 1. the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved provided any self contained
dwellings not assessed under the CSH orr individual bedrooms in the building meet
the compliance requirements for this issue.
CN6 Building has no Please note that where a building contains no residential function this issue is not
residential areas. applicable and will not require assessment.
CN7 Supported living This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living
facilities facilities (for safety reasons, to minimise ligature risk to particular residents).
Methodology
None
164 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Ene 09 Drying space Energy
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Secure space
For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling.
For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents
of the building only.
Other information
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 165
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Transport
166 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport
Aim
To recognise and encourage development in proximity of good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce
transport-related pollution and congestion.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
OR
This credit is only available in cases where a development is unable to achieve any of the available credits using the Accessibility
Index criteria (i.e. its location has a low public transport Accessibility Index).
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 167
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Accessibility Index ≥2 ≥4 ≥8 ≥ 10 ≥ 12 ≥ 18
Transport hub 1 2 3 3 3 4
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply
assessment criteria
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
168 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport
Country specific
General
CN3 Campus Where 80% or more of the buildings on a campus-style development, e.g. further
developments, or higher education sites, are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, then the
see criterion 1 campuses main entrance can be used as the reference point for the assessment of
distance to compliant public transport nodes for this issue.
The campus’ main entrance is that which is accessed by the majority of the assessed
building’s staff/students/visitors. A site may have more than one main entrance
which between them account for the majority of staff, students and visitors that
access the site. In such a case either entrance can be used as the basis for the
calculation.
Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus development are within
1000m of the campus’ main entrance, the assessed building’s main entrance must
be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public
transport node for this issue. This rule implies that for large campus developments,
when distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, the needs of
the building users would be served better by locating the public transport nodes
inside or on the periphery of the campus.
Where the building is not part of a centralised campus then its main entrance must
be used as the reference point for the assessment of this issue.
CN4 Dedicated bus The credit for the provision of a dedicated bus service is available for any building
services, type with a fixed shift pattern; examples could include schools, offices, retail,
see criterion 3 factories, prisons etc. The bus must provide transfer to the local population centre,
public transport interchange or be a door-to-door service. The credit is provided as
an alternative, where the AI of the building is too low to achieve any BREEAM credits,
but where the building users will have the option of a dedicated bus service.
However, a dedicated bus service can be included in the public transport
Accessibility Index calculation as a means of contributing towards achieving credits
via this method (regardless of the shift pattern). Where this is the case, the distance
from the main building entrance to the drop-off/pick-up point (the transport node)
of the service should be used.
CN5 Phased In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be
developments, provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can
see criterion 3 consider such facilities provided that:
A commitment has been made to provide transport facilities within the shortest of
the following periods, this is demonstrated either within the General Contract
Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement:
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 169
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases
have been completed and are ready for occupation. OR
2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build
time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured
from the completion date of that phase.
The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring
that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities
is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use
within a period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be
considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
Methodology
The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL)
method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a
detailed description of the PTAL methodology and how it works refer to appendix B of Transport Assessment Best Practice;
Guidance Document:http://www.tfl.gov.uk/assets/downloads/businessandpartners/transport-assessment-best-practice-
guidance.pdf
Multiple services
Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the
same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node
can be considered as separate.
Bi-directional routes
Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest
frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology).
170 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport
Evidence
1-3 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-2 A completed copy of the Tra01 calculator As per interim design stage
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Accessibility Index
A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of
interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public
transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node.
For example, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service
stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively,
the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The
same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of
compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 171
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public
highway).
For prison/MOD site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the gatehouse entrance.
Operating hours
BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the
majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building
can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during a certain
period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8-10am, then that period
can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building types that
operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis.
During what typically would be deemed unsociable hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public
transport operating, such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the
assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then
refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this
issue.
Rural location
A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large
urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of continuously
built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village locations, green
field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no greater than 20
hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local towns and may
have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport National Travel Survey
definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development indicated on Ordnance Survey
maps
Typical day
The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors will be
at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should
check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for
the entire operating week (excluding Sundays).
Other information
Table 1.2- 1:Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day
172 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport
Healthcare 7.00am - 8.00pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift
pattern)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 173
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Aim
To encourage and reward a building location that facilitates easy access to local services and so reduces the environmental,
social and economic impacts resulting from multiple or extended building user journeys, including transport related emissions
and traffic congestion.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Building types
No. of amenities 4 4 5 4 4 7 4
Core amenities (3 out of the following 4 core amenities must be accessible and within proximity of the building)
Access to cash ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
174 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Transport
Building types
Additional amenities
Community space ü ü ü ü ü ü
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 175
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN4 Collective amenities One type of amenity may also exist within or as part of other types of amenities, e.g.
a grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is
not a requirement of this issue that each amenity is ‘stand alone’.
CN5 Amenities within An amenity within the building or on the same site as the proposed development,
assessed building or e.g. where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park/centre,
on site complies with the assessment criteria.
CN6 Phased The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility,
developments concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
176 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Transport
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Accessible amenities
Amenities (as listed) that are within the required proximity (distance in metres) of the building and accessible via safe
pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements/paths and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing
points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow flies’.
Community space
An internal space that is inclusive to the majority of building users who will occupy the assessed
building/development. The space will serve to facilitate community activities applicable to the assessed building
type,for example for a multi-residential building a community centre or village hall.
Other information
None.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 177
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Aim
To encourage building users to cycle, so promoting exercise and helping reduce congestion and emissions, by ensuring
adequate provision of cyclist facilities,
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit - Cycle storage (excluding sheltered housing, care homes, supported living facilities and
prison building types)
1. Compliant cycle storage spaces that meet the minimum levels set out in Table - 30 (see checklists and tables) are
installed.
One credit - Cyclist facilities (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities,
Student residents, key accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and prison building
types)
2. Criterion 1 has been achieved.
3. At least two of the following types of compliant cyclist facilities have been provided (see compliance notes for the scope
of compliant cyclist facilities):
a. Showers
b. Changing facilities
c. Lockers
d. Drying spaces
One credit - Cycle storage and cyclist facilities (sheltered housing, care homes and supported living
facilities and prison building types only)
4. Where criteria 1 to 3 have been met for cycle space and cycle facilities requirements.
Commercial
178 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport
Retail
Large Retail 1 10 staff The number of staff should be the maximum number
using the building at any time/shift. The staff spaces must
be provided in addition to customer spaces. Whilst they
do not need to be separate from customer spaces, this is
encouraged. This is subject to providing a minimum of 10
cycle customer spaces. Any retail development that
provides at least 50 customer cycle storage spaces will
comply regardless of the number of parking spaces.
1 20 public car
parking spaces
Small retail 10 Total The spaces must be publicly accessible within proximity of
a main building entrance. Compliant cyclist facilities are
intended for staff only i.e. it is not a requirement of
compliance to provide facilities for customers.
Education
Primary School 5 Per form or For example: where a primary school has been designed
class in year to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15
group compliant cycle storage spaces are provided for the
whole school. Where there are varying numbers of
forms/classes per year, the calculation must be based on
the year with the greatest number of classes/forms
Secondary schools 1 10 staff & FE/HE: student numbers must account for both under
and sixth form, pupils/students and post graduates, as well as PhD students and Post-
Further and Higher total Doctorates.
Education (FE and
HE)
Healthcare
All healthcare 1 10 staff Unit of measure: use the measure which is the largest for
building types the building type e.g. if hospital then use beds, if GP
surgery then use consulting rooms. The requirement for
1 2 consulting consulting rooms/beds is subject to a minimum of four
rooms OR 10 compliant cycle storage spaces being provided.
beds
Prison 1 10 staff Only one credit available with the provision of two cyclist
establishment facilities.
located building
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 179
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Multi-residential
1 2 residents
Other buildings
1 10 visitors or
beds
Transport type 3* 1 20 staff A single credit can be awarded where spaces for staff
only are provided as well as the appropriate compliant
cyclist facilities. The Compliance note allowing a reduction
1 1 20 building to the cyclist provision in rural locations has been
visitors/ beds accounted for in the unit of measure for this transport
type. It should not therefore be applied again.
Transport hubs 1 10 public users Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance note) to a
maximum of 5000 daily public users. Public users refer to
regular peak time users of the service who start and/or
finish their public transport journey at the assessed
building.
MOD non- 1 10 living-out These criteria apply to MOD buildings where the majority
residential personnel of personnel live off-site.
180 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport
Note : Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200 the sliding scale of compliance
can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required (see Methodology section).
* See definitions in the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibilityfor classification of transport type 1, 2 and 3.
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Where the credits are being sought the compliant number of cycle storage spaces
must be provided as part of the base build. Compliant cyclist facilities (showers,
changing areas etc.) can be provided in shell and core areas of the building as part
of the base build.Alternatively, compliance can be demonstrated where the shell
and core building is designed to facilitate future installation of the compliant
number and type of cyclist facilities by the tenant/owner-occupier through the
provision of an appropriately sized and dedicated space in the base building,
including either the installation of the appropriate services (for showers) or
infrastructure to allow the future installation of the relevant services e.g. capped
water supply, service /ventilation ducts, drainage etc.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
CN3 Use of local For all buildings which form part of a larger site / development, use of existing local
compliant cycle BREEAM compliant cycle storage space is acceptable.
storage
CN4 Compliant cyclist Where the assessed building has compliant cyclist facilities, plus access to some
facilities and non- local cycle storage spaces that are not BREEAM compliant, one credit can still be
compliant local awarded.
storage spaces
CN5 Compliant cycle Where the assessed building meets the minimum number of compliant cycle
spaces but no cyclist spaces required for two credits, but does not have or meet the minimum provision
facilities for compliant cyclist facilities, then one credit can be awarded.
Country specific
CN6 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 181
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN7 Existing/new site For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site where there exist shared
wide facilities compliant facilities, or where the new building will form a part of a larger
development (e.g. campus, retail or business park), the required number of facilities
can be determined on a development-wide basis. The number of compliant
facilities must be large enough to cater for the building occupants of the assessed
building, in addition to the occupants of any existing or other new buildings that will
share those facilities.
CN8 Building locations For sites where at least 50% of the available BREEAM credits for Public transport
with a high level of accessibility (Tra 01) have been awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit), the
public transport number of compliant cycle spaces required in Table - 30 can be reduced by 50%.
accessibility This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the
same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on
the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required
showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual
requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%.
CN9 Rural locations For sites in rural locations the following can be applied;
1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles, the
number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50%.
2. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 20 miles, the
number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 70%.
3. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 30 miles, the
number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 90%.
This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the
same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on
the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required
showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual
requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as appropriate.
A percentage reduction in this context cannot be applied in addition to the 50%
reduction due to the building's Public Transport Accessibility level (as described in
the Compliance note above).
The definition of a rural location (and urban location) can be found in the BREEAM
issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility – Additional information.
CN10 Number of building If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants commuting to the
occupants unknown development, e.g. speculative developments, then the default occupancy rates
given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity – Tra 04 Maximum car
parking capacity can be used to determine a default number of users. Alternatively,
the number of building occupants in an existing development of similar type and
size can be used (the assessor needs to justify/validate the number used in their
certification report).
CN11 Education (schools In the case of a pre-school or primary school shower provision is for staff only and
only) set at a rate of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a
Compliant showers minimum of one shower being provided). For example, where a primary school has
182 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport
- additional been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant
requirements, see spaces are required to meet the BREEAM criteria for cycle storage, and therefore
criterion 3 two showers for staff use would be required for compliance with the cycle facilities
criterion.
In secondary schools (and sixth forms) where there are less than 100 pupils, a
minimum of two showers must be provided for pupils with one male and one
female shower (where applicable). A minimum of one shower for staff should be
provided in all cases.
CN12 Sheltered housing or Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the
care homes following:
and supported living 1. Charging points for electric buggies (at least two) provided within the storage
facilities space
2. The storage area must be secure yet easily accessible.
3. Lighting of the storage facility must be compliant with the external (or internal
where relevant) lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual
comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid operation during daylight
hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility.
4. Where access to and from the building main entrance needs to be tightly
controlled for the safety/security of residents, and it can be demonstrated
that compliance with points 2 and 3 above impact on this (e.g. where
residents include those with mental health problems), these two items can be
excluded from the compliance requirements.
CN13 Residential buildings The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply in residential buildings with
with transient transient visitors, e.g. hotels, hostels, training centres where the visitor typically
visitors such as resides for less than one month. For a secure accommodation unit compliance
hotels, hostels and should be based on visitors (not beds). In this case, cyclist facilities for staff must be
training centre accessible to all building users to ensure that visitors and patients/community that
will travel to and use or work within the building are provided for.
Methodology
Sliding scale of compliance
To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is
acceptable to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure (defined in
Table - 30) and potentially the provision of cyclist facilities on a sliding scale as follows:
1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 1.5.
2. For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.
3. For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5.
For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage spaces:
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 183
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: small and large retail, primary schools, multi-
residential buildings and MOD residential buildings.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Compliant showers
Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces (unless stated, see below), subject to a minimum
provision of one shower.
2. Any development providing eight showers or more will comply regardless the number of cycle storage spaces
provided.
3. Both male and female users must be catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific
facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use.
4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users/uses.
184 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport
Compliant lockers
Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required.
2. Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms.
3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment.
Other information
None.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 185
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Aim
To encourage the use of alternative means of transport other than the private car to and from the building, thereby helping to
reduce transport related emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building’s operation.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
For most building types, except those where stated, the benchmarks vary according to the buildings public transport
Accessibility Index (determined in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility). Therefore, for
these building types the AI must be determined prior to assessing this issue. This is required to ensure that the building’s
car parking capacity is relative to the development's accessibility to the public transport network.
<4 ≥4-<8 ≥8
5 6 7 2
186 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport
<4 ≥4-<8 ≥8
20 25 30 2
4 5 6 2
For the building types listed below, the maximum number of parking spaces provided must not be greater than the total
of the following:
Healthcare - Hospitals (acute, specialist, teaching, mental One parking space for every four staff, plus; 1
health) One parking space for every four beds, plus
Two parking spaces for each consulting,
examination, treatment, therapy room and
A&E cubicle.
Healthcare - GP surgery, health centre, community hospital One parking space for every two medical 1
staff, plus;
One parking space for every three non-
medical staff, plus;
Two parking spaces for each consulting,
examination, treatment, therapy room and
A&E cubicle.
Pre-school, schools, sixth form, Retail, Prison, Court, Other Issue not assessed for these building types
Building – Transport type 3, Other Building – Transport hubs
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 187
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
All Where relevant, a completed copy Tra 01 calculator As per interim design stage.
confirming the building's Accessibility Index
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Accessibility Index
Refer to Tra 01 Public transport accessibility
Building Users
Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the following, where relevant to the
building type:
1. Staff (who will work within the building).
2. Students (who will access the building for work or study during a typical academic term-time /semester day).
3. Residents (who will reside permanently or for a short period of time in the building).
If known, or can be reasonably estimated, project specific occupancy figures should be used. If this is not possible, for
example where the building is a speculative development, use the default occupancy rates given in Table - 32 in the
Other information section (below) to determine the number of users. Where the number of building users is variable,
188 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport
provision of parking spaces should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building
at any time during a typical day.
Care homes
For the purpose of BREEAM, care homes are defined as those buildings which are legally required to register with the
Commission for Social Care Inspection by the Care Standards Act, 2000.
Sheltered housing
Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (use Classes) Order 1987, and can be
defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a
resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as 'Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3' in accordance with the 1969
Ministry of Housing and Local Government circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines.
Other information
Table - 32: Table - 32Default occupancy rates by building type
Building type and function area Occupant Building type and function area Occupant
density density
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 189
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Building type and function area Occupant Building type and function area Occupant
density density
24-hours consulting/treatment areas 0.000 General Assembly and Leisure, Clubs, Theatres
190 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport
Building type and function area Occupant Building type and function area Occupant
density density
Reception 0.105
1. The net floor area for each function must be multiplied by the equivalent occupant density to determine an overall
occupancy for the function area.
2. Not all potential building areas are listed, only those required to reflect estimated building occupancy for the building
type. For example, an office building may have a canteen but it will be the staff that predominantly uses the canteen. The
office staff numbers will be estimated using the default occupancy rate for the office area; therefore to include the
canteen would result in double counting of occupancy.
3. If a building type is not listed, occupancy rates for a similar building type or function area may be used.
4. The above occupancy rates have been sourced from the activity database of the Simplified Building Energy Model
(SBEM).
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 191
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To recognise the consideration given to accommodating a range of travel options for building users, thereby encouraging
the reduction of reliance on forms of travel that have the highest environmental impact.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
Compliance notes
192 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Tra 05 Travel plan Transport
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
A travel plan is still required even if the end user/occupier is not known, albeit that it
may only be an interim travel plan or one that broadly addresses all the issues
covered in the assessment criteria. The developer must confirm that they will hand
over a copy of the travel plan to the building’s future tenant(s)/owner-occupier, so
that it may inform their own travel plan/strategy.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Existing travel The credit can be awarded if the assessed building is part of a site that has an
plan,see criterion 3 existing up-to-date organisational travel plan that is compliant with BREEAM, is
applicable to all building users (in existing and assessed new buildings) and accounts
for the additional travel resulting from users of the new building.
CN5 Travel assessment A travel assessment (also referred to as transport assessment) will be required
or where a proposed development is likely to have significant transport and related
Statement environmental impacts. The study area for a transport assessment related to a
see criterion 2 proposed development should be determined in discussion between the
developer and appropriate authorities. A transport statement is required where
the proposed development is not likely to have a significant transport impact. A
transport statement is suitable to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM when the
proposed development is expected to generate relatively low numbers of trips or
traffic flows, with minor transport impacts. For further guidance refer
to:https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/guidance-on-transport-
assessment
Methodology
None.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 193
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Travel plan
A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation, principally to increase choice and
reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or development by sustainable modes of transport. A travel
plan contains both physical and behavioural measures to increase travel choices and reduce reliance on single-occupancy car
travel.
Building users
Where the term building users is referenced, this refers to the following, as appropriate to building type:
1. Staff (commuter journeys and business travel)
2. Pupils/students
3. Visitors
4. Patients
5. Customers
6. Community users
7. Personnel who make deliveries/collections to and from the development
8. Contractors/service providers, who regularly work at and access the building/development
9. Residents of multi-residential buildings
Other information
None.
194 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Water
Water
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 195
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
5 Yes
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water for sanitary use in new buildings from all sources through the use of water
efficient components and water recycling systems.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
Up to five credits
1. An assessment of the efficiency of the building’s domestic water consuming components is undertaken using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
2. The water consumption (litres/person/day) for the assessed building is compared against a baseline performance and
BREEAM credits awarded based upon Table - 33.
3. The efficiency of the following ‘domestic scale’ water consuming components must be included in the assessment
(where specified):
a. WCs
b. Urinals
c. Taps (wash hand basins and where specified kitchen taps and waste disposal unit)
d. Showers
e. Baths
f. Dishwashers (domestic and commercial sized)
g. Washing machine (domestic and commercial or industrial sized)
The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building types and activity areas for which the above components must be
assessed.
4. Where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified, its yield (l/person/day) is used to off-set non potable water
demand from components that would otherwise be supplied using potable water.
5. Any greywater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8525-1:2010 Greywater Systems - Part 1
Code of Practice1. Any rainwater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8515:2009 Rainwater
Harvesting Systems - Code of practice2.
6. Healthcare and prison buildings: refer to the relevant Compliance note for additional criteria regarding the specification
of particular water consuming component controls.
196 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 01 Water consumption Water
12.5% 1
25% 2
40% 3
50% 4
55% 5
Note: for some building types an alternative approach to compliance must be used to award credits (for further information
please refer to the Methodology section, below, and the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator)
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 197
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN5 No fittings present Where a project under assessment contains none of the specified components, the
performance specification for components provided in facilities in an adjacent and
accessible building must be used in the calculation, i.e. those facilities most likely to
be used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed building.
This rule also applies where a project under assessment consists solely of an
extension to an existing building, i.e. where the extended building contains no new
sanitary facilities because there are facilities present within the existing building.
Building specific
CN6 Healthcare In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the flushing control for each WC
Components in or urinal in a healthcare facility must be suitable for operation by patients with frail
healthcare facilities or infirm hands or activated by electronic sensors.
See criterion 6. Components in clinical areas maybe omitted from the calculation. For the purpose
of this compliance note ‘clinical areas’ refers to all areas where a scrub-up trough,
clinical sink or clinical basin is installed. This is not an exhaustive list and guidance
should always be sought from the appropriate professional, such as a Health
Authorities Infection control officer or a client infection control representative or
equivalent, to ascertain areas of exemption specific to infection control and other
considerations.
Although exempt, HTM07-04 contains guidance on water savings from medical
related activities. Furthermore, in some cases, the use of water-efficient fittings and
appliances may not be appropriate to the needs of the patient, and inappropriate
specification may adversely affect the incidence and propagation of infections. In
such instances, the assessor will need to confirm with BRE Global the exemption of
components from the relevant building areas. The design team should also consult
NHS guidelines concerning appropriate selection of sanitary fittings and fixtures
and the control of legionella.
CN7 Prisons In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the following requirements apply:
Components in Where sanitary components are specified within a prison cell, a volume controller
prison cells on HM must be specified on the individual fittings or water supply to each cell. A volume
Prison controller is an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the
developments maximum pre-set volume is reached within a defined period.
See criterion 6.
Methodology
A non domestic building’s water-efficient performance is determined using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator in one of two ways,
using either the standard approach (common building types) or alternative (other building type) approach. Each approach is
summarised below.
198 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 01 Water consumption Water
The baseline component specification is equivalent to the water efficiency of industry standard components (seeTable - 34),
steered by the minimum levels required by the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations. The BREEAM percentage
improvement benchmarks have then been determined based on progressively more efficient standards for water
consuming components and, for the higher levels of performance, the specification of greywater and rainwater systems.
The standard approach is the default method for calculating water efficiency of a BREEAM assessed building and is that used
for most of the common building types, where usage data are available. For buildings types where usage data are not
available, and therefore the standard approach of determining performance cannot be used, an alternative approach to
compliance must be used (described below). Refer to the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for the current list of building types which
can be assessed using the standard approach.
1. Using the list of applicable domestic scale water consuming components (see criterion 3), determine those that are
specified/present in the assessed building.
2. Compare the actual specification for each component type with the table of water efficient consumption levels by
component type (Table - 34) to determine the level of performance for each type. Note that the volumes quoted are
maximums for that level and the % WC or urinal flushing demand is a minimum for that level.
3. Define each component’s level of performance in the 'Other building type calculator' worksheet of the BREEAM Wat 01
calculator.
a. For the alternative approach, the calculator applies a building type specific weighting to each component level to
reflect its ‘in-use’ consumption relative to the other components present. A component with high ‘in-use’ water
consumption therefore has a larger weighting than one with lower ‘in-use’ consumption and contributes relatively
more to the building’s overall level of performance under this BREEAM issue.
b. The weightings are derived from data on actual water consumption per day from non domestic buildings, sourced
from BNWAT22 3. They can be found in the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
4. Based upon the performance categorisation of each component type and the component weighting, the calculator will
determine an overall,aggregate level of performance and award the relevant number of BREEAM credits as follows:
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 199
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Note:
1. An innovation credit for exemplary level performance can be awarded where the component
specification achieves level 5 and > 95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled non
potable water.
2. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved will not necessarily be a whole
number, e.g component level 4. Where this is the case the methodology will always round down to the
nearest component level and therefore BREEAM credit(s) level, e.g. if the component specification
achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology will not
round up to 4 credits because the performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved).
3. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water consuming
component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification can be
entered in the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator will determine the
building’s aggregated performance level for that component type.
Please note: whilst attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both methodologies described above, they do
determine performance in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could therefore differ for
the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when applying BREEAM New
Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall development.
Component Type
Table - 34 outlines the standards, by component type, used to define the performance levels set in BREEAM. These defined
levels of efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information (see references4) and therefore reflect
robust levels of typical, good, best and exemplary practice.
Component Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level)
Base 1 2 3 4 5 Unit
Urinal 10 8 4 2 1 0 litres/bowl/hour
(1 urinal only)
200 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 01 Water consumption Water
Component Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level)
Base 1 2 3 4 5 Unit
dishwashers
Please note that specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels will result, in most cases, in the
corresponding number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, please bear in mind that the component specifications
above are akin to thresholds between each level. Therefore caution should be taken when defining a component specification
for a BREEAM assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01
BREEAM credits are being targeted, the performance of a particular building’s component specification is verified using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering/installing components. This will
provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM credits.
WCs Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use.
Urinals Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing frequency/hour
and cistern capacity in litres
Taps Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure:
For high pressure (Type 1) taps - 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) OR
For low pressure (Type 2) taps - 0.1 ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± 0.002 MPa)
(BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply systems of type 1 and 2.
General technical specifications)
This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions.
Showers Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30˚C), in litres per minute measured at a
dynamic pressure
3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems
OR
0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± 0.005 MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems
(BS EN 1112:2008, Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply systems type
1 and 2. General technical specifications).
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 201
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Baths Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as the water
consumption from bath taps is taken account of in the use factor for baths. The calculation of water
consumption for baths will assume 40% of the capacity to the overflow. This is to reflect that:
a) Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and
b) The displacement affect the user has on the actual volume of water required for a bath.
Dishwasher Litres/cycle for domestic applications and/or appliances or litres/rack for commercial applications and/or
appliances.
Washing Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) and/or appliances or litres/kg for
machine commercial applications and/or appliances, e.g. in hotels.
Where greywater and/or rainwater systems are specified there is a minimum level of component efficiency that must be
achieved to award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM
credits where performance from less efficient fittings is off-set by the specification of a greywater and/or rainwater collection
system.
202 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 01 Water consumption Water
The intention being to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before off-setting consumption. Where a greywater/rainwater
system is specified/installed, the component specification must achieve a percentage reduction in water consumption (over
the baseline specification) equivalent to that required for 2 credits, i.e. a 25% improvement. Where this level is achieved, all of
the total water demand met by greywater/rainwater sources can contribute to the overall percentage improvement
required to achieve BREEAM credits. If it is not achieved, the percentage of greywater/rainwater allowable will be equivalent to
the percentage improvement in water consumption achieved for the component specification, i.e. percentage improvement
on baseline performance.
For example, if only a 20% improvement is achieved, and therefore the building is not meeting the 25% requirement, then
only 20% of the water demand met via greywater/rainwater sources can be used to off-set water consumption from the
micro components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits are sought or where no
greywater/rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on the water efficiency of the micro-
component specification.
BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow rate due to
specialised end-user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with 25% improvement.
Determine the building’s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each relevant
activity area/building type. On completion of each assessment, the assessor will need to determine the percentage
improvement as follows:
Where greywater/rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double counting of the
yield from such systems and using it to off-set demand for each activity area/building type.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 203
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
systems/components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable water demand from the building's WC/Urinal
components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could include laundry use in hotels/multi-residential developments
or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental
planting irrigation are not considered as equivalent/intrinsic by BREEAM.
Evidence
1-6 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01calculator As per interim design stage
Additional information
Relevant definitions
204 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 01 Water consumption Water
domestic (residential) buildings/areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4
litre dual flush volume WC as an example:
Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
The differing ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user behaviour
between these building types.
Greywater recycling
The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged
from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g.
WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building.
Potable water
Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of Wholesomeness) of
the Water Industry Act 1991 5 is referred to as wholesome water.
Rainwater recycling
The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable
water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed
building.
Clinical areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Other Information
None
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 205
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
206 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 02 Water monitoring Water
Aim
To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed, and therefore encourage reductions.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
One credit
1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is
supplied via a borehole or other private source.
2. Water-consuming plant or building areas, consuming 10% or more of the building’s total water demand, are either
fitted with easily accessible sub meters or have water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area (see
Compliance notes).
3. Each meter (main and sub) has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System (BMS) for the
monitoring of water consumption.
4. If the site on which the building is located has an existing BMS, managed by the same occupier/owner (as the new
building), the pulsed water meter(s) for the new building must be connected to the existing BMS.
Compliance Notes
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 207
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
for water consuming plant/building areas identifiable by the developer (also see
definitions). Water consuming plant/building areas to be added/installed by the
tenant do not need to be assessed for this issue.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Water consuming As a minimum this includes the following (where present):
plant or building 1. Buildings with a swimming pool and its associated changing facilities
area, (toilets, showers etc.).
see Criterion 2 2. On sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial
units, retail parks etc. separate sub meters are fitted on the water
supply to the following areas (where present):
Each individual unit supplied with water
Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks)
Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage,
delivery, waste disposal areas etc.)
Ancillary/separate buildings to the main development with
water supply.
3. Laboratory: in any building with a laboratory or containing laboratories,
a separate water meter is fitted on the water supply to any process or
cooling loop for ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment.
4. Healthcare: for sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health
centres or acute hospitals, separate sub meters are fitted on the supply
to the following areas where present:
Staff and public areas
Clinical areas and wards
Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit
Laundries
Main production kitchen
Hydrotherapy pools
Laboratories
CSSD/HSDU, pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other
major process water use
Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank
CN5 10% of water The sub-meter requirement does not necessarily apply in the following cases,
demand, where the assessor confirms there will be no additional monitoring benefit
see criterion 2. resulting from their installation:
208 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 02 Water monitoring Water
1. Where a building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an
office with sanitary fittings and a small kitchen)
2. Where the building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger
than the other, and the water consumption for the larger demand is likely to
mask the smaller demand.
CN6 Extensions to If no new water supply is being installed because the occupants of the extended
existing buildings, building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building,
see criterion 4. then the following must be provided in the existing building;
1. A water meter for the mains water supply
2. Sub-meters for large water consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative
cooling, swimming pool etc. (where present).
The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in
accordance with the assessment criteria.
CN7 No water supply to If there is no installed water supply to the assessed building because there will be no
the building or unit water-consuming fittings in the building, then in such instances the guidance given in
the above Compliance note for extensions to existing building applies.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Additional Information
Relevant definitions
Staff areas
Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Clinical areas
Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Patient areas
Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
CSSD
Central Sterile Supply Department.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 209
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
HSDU
Hospital Sterilisation and Disinfection Unit.
Other information
None.
210 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 03 Water leak detection Water
2 No
Aim
To reduce the impact of water leaks that may otherwise go undetected.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
Compliance notes
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 211
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
criteria apply.
Flow control devices, criterion 2
Option 1 -Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type
and function apply.
The WC areas or facilities must be assessed as per criterion 2 regardless of whether
or not the WC areas or facilities are fitted out.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN3 Automatic excess An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch (‘fuse’) to automatically stop
flow valve, the flow of water and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water
See point 2 CN2. exceeds a predetermined rate (such as may occur in the event of failure of water
supply pipes and tanks).
Country specific
CN4 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
General
CN5 Leakage ratess S This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be
See criterion 1. however the leak detection equipment installed must have the flexibility to
distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the
building type and owner/occupier’s usage patterns.
CN6 System criteria It is anticipated that the leak detection credit will usually be achieved by installing a
See criterion 1. system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters.
It does not necessarily require a system that directly detects water leakage along
part or the whole length of the water supply system.
CN7 Water utilities Where there is a water utilities meter at the site/building boundary, it may be
meters necessary to install a separate flow meter (or alternative measurement system) just
See criterion 2. after the utility meter to detect leaks; however, if the water utility company agrees
to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be
acceptable.
212 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 03 Water leak detection Water
CN8 Flow control device The following could be considered as types of flow control devices:
See criterion 2.
A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the
water supply after a predetermined interval
A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to
switch water on and/or off at predetermined times.
A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water
supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached.
A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device detecting
occupancy or movement in an area to switch water on and turn it off when
the presence is removed.
A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for an
overall managed water control system, utilising some or all of the types of
control elements listed above.
CN9 Flow control Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female
systemsSee criterion toilets within a core; they are not required for each individual sanitary appliance. The
2. criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to each WC block
when it is not being used.
CN10 Single WCs The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single
See criterion 2. WC (potentially within smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shut-
off could be provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether
proximity detection or a manual switch).
CN11 No water supply to These credits are still assessed where there are no installed fittings and therefore
the building or/ unit no water supply to the building. In these instances the facilities likely to be used by
See criteria 1 and 2. the future occupants of the assessed building must meet the criteria, e.g. those
facilities within the nearest accessible building.
CN12 Extensions to If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water
existing buildings, supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.
see criteria 1 and 2
CN13 Clinical areas in The criteria for this issue do not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas.
healthcare buildings
Methodology
None.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 213
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Clinical areas
Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Other information
None.
214 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Water
1 No
Aim
To reduce unregulated water consumption by encouraging specification of water efficient equipment.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit
1. Identify the building's unregulated water demands and for each, estimate or model its contribution to the total non-
domestic water consumption of the building.
2. Identify the system(s) or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated water demand of the
development and its operation, and demonstrate through either good practice design or specification a meaningful
reduction in the total water demand of the building.
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 215
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Major impact on For a typical office building this would constitute around 10% of total water
water demand demand. For different building types and developments what is deemed as
'significant' will vary.
CN5 Reducing BREEAM does not prescriptively define all potential means or solutions for reducing
unregulated water unregulated water consumption. The design team needs to demonstrate to the
consumption assessor that they have identified key areas of water consumption in the building
and that a reduction in unregulated water consumption has been achieved using
existing 'tried and tested' solutions or new innovative solutions relevant to the
building and its functional requirements.
The following are some examples of solutions 'deemed to satisfy compliance' for a
number of different building types or functions (where the unregulated water
demand for that function is one of/the significant contributor in the building):
1. Drip fed subsurface irrigation incorporating soil moisture sensors. The
irrigation control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different
planting assemblages.
2. Reclaimed/recovered water from a rainwater collection or waste water
recovery system, with appropriate storage, i.e. greywater collection from
building functions or processes that use potable water, e.g. vehicle wash,
sanitary facilities, irrigation etc. This should take into account the Government
Buying Standards1 where appropriate to the building type.
3. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all
seasons of the year.
4. All planting specified is restricted to contextually appropriate species that
thrive without irrigation and will continue to do so in those conditions likely as
a result of climate change, i.e. typically warmer and drier conditions.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
216 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Water
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Unregulated water
For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, unregulated water is water not used for domestic purposes and is therefore
not regulated by building regulations or other relevant legislation. This includes, but is not limited to, equipment used
for irrigation and, for the relevant building types, vehicle wash plant/equipment.
Other information
None.
1http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/products/water-using-products/
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 217
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Materials
218 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact (including embodied carbon)
over the full life cycle of the building.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Up to six credits
1. BREEAM awards credits on the basis of the building’s quantified environmental life cycle impact through assessment of
the main building elements, as set out in Table - 36 below:
Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type
Office ü ü ü ü ü
Retail ü ü ü ü ü
Industrial ü ü
Education ü ü ü ü ü ü
Healthcare ü ü ü ü ü ü
Prisons ü - ü ü - ü
Courts ü ü ü ü ü ü
Multi-residential ü ü ü ü ü ü
Other buildings ü ü ü ü ü ü
2. Credits are awarded on the basis of the total number of points achieved, as set out inTable - 37 below, and calculated
using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. This point’s score is based on the Green Guide rating(s) achieved for the
specifications that make-up the main building elements (as above).
Note: Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 219
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
whole life cycle, is available for a material or product that forms part of an assessed building element, this can be used to
increase the contribution of that element to the building’s Mat 01 performance (refer to Calculation procedure where a
specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material under the Methodology section for more detail).
Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points
Office 1 1 2 3 4 5 -
Retail 1 1 2 3 4 5 -
Industrial 1 2 - - - - -
Education 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Healthcare 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Prisons 1 1 2 3 4 - -
Courts 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Multi- 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
residential
Other 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
buildings
1. Please refer toMethodology section (below) for a description of the methodology used to determine the number
of points and BREEAM credits achieved.
2. Where the total points achieved exceeds the level required for maximum credits see the exemplary level criteria as
the building may be eligible for an additional innovation credit.
3. Life cycle Green House Gas emissions (kgCO eq.) for each element are also required to be reported based on a 60-year
2
building life. Where specific data is not available for a product or element, generic data should be used. Generic data can
be obtained from the online Green Guide for each element and must be entered in to the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.
Route 1: Using the Green Guide to Specification (elemental approach) - one credit
4. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points in addition to the
total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria (as outlined in the table above) OR
5. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point in addition to the
total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria.
Where the assessed building does not specify an element listed above, see the Compliance note regarding the exemplary
level benchmark.
220 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
Route 2: Using compliant life cycle assessment software tools (whole building approach) - two credits
6. Where the design team has used an IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) to measure the environmental
impact of the building.
7. Where the design team can demonstrate how the use of an IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) has benefited
the building in terms of measuring and reducing its environmental impact. See CN16
8. Where the design team submit the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or
equivalent) for the assessed building to BRE Global (via the project’s appointed BREEAM assessor).See CN17.
Further information about IMPACT is provided in the Other information section of this BREEAM issue.
Please note a project can achieve all three innovation credits where it is complying with exemplary level criteria 4 to 8, i.e. one
route is not necessarily exclusive of the other, a project can comply with both routes 1 and 2 or choose to comply with only
route 1 or only route 2
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment criteria Where floor finishes and internal walls are applicable to the building type being
assessed, the following applies to both the options:
In addition to the main building elements, all building areas where floor finishes
and/or internal walls are being specified/installed by the developer (Including those
in common areas, show areas and other fitted out areas) must be accounted for in
the assessment of this issue.
Office buildings: If the developer has specified floor finishes in a show area only (for
compliance with BREEAM issue Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes), the
area (m2) and Green Guide rating of the floor finishes in the show area must be
accounted for in the assessment of Mat 01.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 -Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 221
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN4 Element not Where the building does not contain an element listed above, for example there are
specified no upper floors in a single storey building, the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator allows the
See criteria 1, 2, 4 BREEAM assessor to exclude the element from the assessment. In such instances
and 5. the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator will re-calculate the standard and exemplary level
benchmarks on the basis of the remaining applicable elements.
CN5 Element consisting Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the Green Guide
of more than one rating and area for each specification should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 01
specification calculator. The calculator will then determine the total points score on the basis of
See criterion 2. each specifications rating and area as a proportion of the whole element.
CN6 Finding exact Green While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to
Guide Ratings. identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment
See criterion 2. (also see note below ‘No Green Guide rating match’).
CN7 No Green Guide Where a generic Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification the
rating match. BREEAM assessor can use the online Green Guide calculator to determine a
See criterion 2. bespoke Green Guide rating for the specification (for any elements except floor
finishes). Licensed BREEAM assessors can access the calculator via
www.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component is not present via the online
Green Guide calculator, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green
Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will respond to the query with a solution and /or
guidance to enable completion of a specification.
Refer to Green Guide Calculator Online Tool guidance for more information.
CN8 Environmental Products with certified Environmental Profiles can be used to demonstrate
Profile Certification compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a “product specific”
of products Green Guide rating as part of a relevant elemental specification, e.g. a
See criterion 2. manufacturer’s concrete block as part of an external wall specification. This rating
can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating for this BREEAM issue
(see the Additional informationsection for a screenshot example of a product
listing from GreenBook Live).
Where a certified product forms part of a different specification, for the same or
different element type (i.e. different to that described on the Environmental Profile
certificate), the guidance within the 'Methodology' section concerning
Environmental Product Declaration types should be followed. This procedure
outlines how BREEAM gives additional recognition for materials with robust
Environmental Product Declaration types.
Refer to BRE Environmental Profile Methodology under Additional information
section for more information on where to source an Environmental Profile
Certificate.
CN9 Reporting life cycle Where the data is available, it is a requirement that the life cycle GHG emissions
GHG emissions (kgCO eq.) for each specification are gathered and reported, via the BREEAM
2
See criterion 3. scoring and reporting tool. BREEAM assessors can source this information as
follows:
For generic Green Guide ratings the. is reported via the online green guide
www.thegreenguide.org.uk. Simply click on the relevant specification type (having
222 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
already defined the building, category and element type) and the. are reported
along with the individual category ratings for that element, at the bottom of the
page (see screen shot in the Additional information section). The information is not
available at present for bespoke Green Guide ratings.
For Green Guide ratings based on a product manufacturer’s certified Environmental
Profile, Assessors will find the. in the product’s Environmental Profile Certificate
appendix, in the ‘Characterised data’ section (against the ‘Climate Change’ issue).
CN10 New elements If a new element is specified e.g. external wall, and part of that element includes a
containing re-used reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a
materials See Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and
criterion 2. confirm the result to the assessor.
CN11 Existing elements re- Only new elements need to be assessed. Existing in situ elements adjoining a new
used in the new construction, e.g. an existing building facade, do not require assessment. If this
construction BREEAM scheme is being used to assess a major refurbishment project, where the
assessed building is re-using existing in situ elements as part of its structure, those
elements can be allocated an A+ Green Guide rating. If the existing element will
contain substantial new materials the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a
Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and
confirm the result to the assessor.
CN12 Partial assessments Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must
See criterion 1. still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly
above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide
rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic
roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building or space can be
omitted from the assessment.
CN13 Specialist floor Specialist floor finishes (See definition) in operational areas of buildings fall outside
finishes in of the scope of the Green Guide.In such instances, only non specialist floor finishes
operational areas and those in non-operational areas of the building should be included in the
See criterion 1. assessment of this BREEAM issue. See also guidance in Additional information
section, on floor finishes.
CN14 Roof lights, patio For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as
doors and glazed patio doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of
conservatories See conservatories and roof lights should be assessed as windows.
criterion 1.
CN15 Where integral For insulated cold storage units forming an integral part of the building fabric the
insulated cold following must be followed
storage units form a 1. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall
part of the building element:
fabric As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide
on the basis that it is a normal temperature building without the extra
insulation, so a standard thickness of insulation will be considered. As such, the
walls of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall
element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 223
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
2. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element:
As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included
within the Green Guide. Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be
assessed as a standard construction from the deck upwards, assuming a
standard thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should
be treated as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM
issue.
3. Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element:
The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific Functional Unit
outside the scope of the internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The
wall to the insulated unit should therefore be excluded from the assessment
of the internal wall element.
CN16 Demonstrating This should take the form of a short qualitative statement from the design team
benefit providing comments on the following:
See Criterion 7. 1. How and at what stages of the design the tool was utilised.
2. How the tool helped (or did not help) steer the design process to optimise
cost and mitigate environmental impacts, giving examples of specific changes
to the building design/specification that resulted.
CN17 Scope of IMPACT Guidance note GN08 : Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data
Compliant (or Submission Requirements available via the Assessor Extranet outlines in detail the
equivalent) Tools requirements for submitting the BIM from IMPACT compliant (or equivalent)
and Data software tools. The Guidance Note also contains instructions on how tools other
Submission than IMPACT compliant software tools can demonstrate equivalency for the
Requirements purpose of this assessment issue. Assessors should review Guidance Note GN08
See Criterion 8. and ensure that submissions meet the criteria relevant to demonstrate compliance.
CN18 Building specific All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
guidance
Methodology
Determining the number of BREEAM credits achieved as a result of each element’s Green Guide
rating
The Green Guide uses an A+ to E rating system, whereby the rating relates to the relative life cycle performance of a
specification in comparison with other types of specifications available for a particular building element type e.g. external wall.
Three steps are undertaken to translate the performance of all the separate individual elemental specifications and their
Green Guide ratings into an overall building performance score for life cycle impact, against which BREEAM credits can be
awarded. Each of these steps is undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator and the information collated by the BREEAM
assessor. The steps in this process are as follows:
224 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
A+ 3.00
A 2.00
B 1.00
C 0.50
D 0.25
E 0.00
The maximum number of points available for an assessed building is a product of the number of elements assessed
multiplied by three. For example, for an office building five elements are assessed so there are a maximum of fifteen points
available; furthermore twelve of those fifteen points must be achieved to award all five BREEAM credits.
Whilst it may appear that three points are available for each element assessed, and in many assessments this may be the case,
the actual maximum number of points available for a particular element will depend on the impact of the element type
compared with the other elements present and assessed (refer to step 3 below). This is because this issue assesses the life
cycle impact of the whole building, taking in to account the relative performance and therefore contribution of the main
building elements towards the building’s overall performance.
An example of this is provided below for an external wall element consisting of three different types of external wall
specification.
This adjustment is made to ensure the contribution of points is balanced in accordance with the life cycle performance of each
specification.
Step 3: Weighting the performance of individual elements relative to all elements assessed
Step three is completed in two parts:
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 225
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Part 1: Weights the performance of the building elements based on its area relative to the overall area of the different
elements. This is done by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all
elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements.
For example, a 20-storey office block will have a smaller roof area than external wall area, and so the area weighting will take
this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the points score for the roof in comparison to the external walls.
Part 2: The range of impacts, measured using Ecopoints, for each of the elements will differ and therefore so will the
increments between each Green Guide rating level. For example, the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the
internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating, the rating of the external walls achieves a
higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction
possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element.
Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material
The Green Guide online provides users (design teams and clients) with information on the relative life cycle environmental
impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications e.g. external wall, roof, windows etc. Each specification’s
online Green Guide rating is based on verified LCA data for generic construction products assessed according to BRE’s
Environmental Profiles Methodology.
There are many different schemes producing EPD for products or services complying with BS ISO 14025 (there is specific
construction product and service variant of BS ISO 14025; BS ISO 21930) using LCA according to the BS ISO 14040 series.
Where a third party verified EPD is available for a product that forms part of an assessed element, for example a concrete
block used in an external wall, the EPD can potentially be used to uplift the element’s BREEAM performance, i.e. points and
therefore credits achieved. The degree of uplift available in such instances depends on three factors:
Using this information, the points achieved for the existing Green Guide rating of the element is adjusted as follows (using the
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator):
1. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element that the material with the EPD contributes is
determined using the Online Green Guide Calculator 1 The Online Green Guide calculator will list the relative
environmental impact of each constituent material of a defined element as a percentage. Select the percentage for the
relevant material and enter this into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.
If an element cannot be defined using the Online Green Guide Calculator the assessor will need to complete a Bespoke
Green Guide Query Proforma and submit to BRE Global, who will then confirm the relevant proportional impact of the
material(s) in question. This will also be required for a material with a BRE Environmental Profile which is specified as part
of an element that differs from the elemental description on which that profile is based (see also relevant compliance
note above).
2. Define the Environmental Product Declaration type and tier level (seeTable - 38 below) for the material(s) in question.
Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking
1 A third-party, independently verified EPD covering the whole life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-grave).
2 A third-party, independently verified EPD covering partial life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-gate or cradle-
to-gate with options*).
226 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
1. The product stage only. Such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated
processes; this EPD is said to be “cradle to gate”;
2. The product stage and selected further life cycle stages. Such an EPD is said to be “cradle to gate with options”
In both cases, the above EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements of the ISO 14020 series, particularly
ISO 14025 and ISO 21930 2 (concerning environmental labels and declarations) and ISO 14040 3 and 14044 4 (concerning
life cycle assessment).
3. Once the element’s Green Guide rating and the relevant material(s) proportional impact and EPD type and tier level have
been defined, the points uplift can be calculated (see Table - 39 below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator does this by
multiplying the material’s proportional impact by the maximum points uplift available for the Green Guide rating
achieved for the element. The points uplift is then added to the points already achieved for that element’s generic Green
Guide rating (see worked example below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator then continues its calculation procedure, as
outlined in steps 2 and 3 above, to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.
Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type
Existing Green Guide Generic Green Guide EPD Tier 1 EPD Tier 2
Rating rating Points Max points uplift Max. points uplift
The points uplift for tier 1 has been linked to the points available for achieving generic Green Guide ratings. An element whose
constituent materials have each had their life cycle impacts quantified and independently verified i.e. tier 1 EPD, will achieve a
points uplift to the next level above that achieved for the elements generic Green Guide rating. The tier 2 points uplift is set
relative to tier 1, based on the fact that a tier 2 EPD covers only part of the material/element life cycle i.e. cradle to gate and not
the full life cycle i.e. cradle to grave.
Example: The following is an example of the above calculation for a theoretical external wall specification with a generic Green
Guide B rating (which equates to one point).
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 227
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Insulation 3% None 0
In the above example therefore, having product specific Environmental Product Declarations for 80% (by impact) of the Green
Guide B rated element’s materials results in a points uplift of 0.78 (a 78% uplift on the element’s BREEAM performance in this
instance). This uplift could make a difference in the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the building.
Evidence
1-5 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1. Element numbers are unique but the available specifications may change. As a result assessors should keep a note
of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
228 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
Ecopoint
The Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that measures the total environmental impact of a
product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe. The annual environmental impact caused
by a typical European citizen therefore creates 100 Ecopoints. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the
range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building element.
Reused materials
Reused materials are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further
processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 229
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
to other materials).
Other information
1. Domestic
2. Commercial (offices)
3. Health
4. Retail
5. Industrial
6. Education
To obtain the appropriate Green Guide ratings for the assessed building elements, select the category that corresponds to
the assessed building type. See below for guidance on which category to select for building types not listed above.
Please note there are a number of common building elements (see below) and therefore Green Guide ratings. As these
elements are common, any building type can be selected to determine the appropriate rating (regardless of the actual non-
domestic building type being assessed).
Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings
Further or When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in most cases the Green
Higher Guide ratings listed under the ‘Education’ category can be used. Alternatively, if the elemental specification
Education of the building/space is more akin to a commercial, retail, industrial or health specification in terms of its
buildings Green Guide functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the relevant the building type.
Prison To obtain appropriate ratings for elements that are not common (upper-floors, roofs and floor finishes),
buildings select the ‘healthcare’ category. For prison building types that are more akin to commercial buildings in their
construction e.g. visitors’ centres, catering buildings, sports halls select the commercial category. These
categories include ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for these types
of prison buildings.
Law court To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for elements that are not common (internal walls, roof, upper
buildings floor slab and floor finishes) select the ‘schools’ category for court buildings. This category includes ratings
that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for this building type. For floor finishes, it is
permissible to select flooring from another building type other than schools, if the function/use in the
assessed building is more appropriate to that type.
Other For many other building types assessed it may be clear which category of building type to select for Green
buildings Guide purposes (for elements that are not common). If it is not clear the BREEAM assessor will need to
contact BRE Global for advice, supplying a description of the building including the relevant function(s). BRE
Global will then confirm to the BREEAM assessor the appropriate category to select.
Common The following elements, for the purpose of non-domestic buildings, have common Green Guide ratings
230 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore,
the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification
and Green Guide rating for the building (if floor finishes are one of the applicable elements). For example, for ‘back of house’
office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings
under the ‘commercial’ category of the Green Guide online. To aid users of the Green Guide online, there is a diagram that will
direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor
Finishes category.
Specialist floor finishes in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. This is due to the specific
high performance requirements of the specifications, such as chemical, temperature and/or impact resistance etc., all of which
limit the options available for specification. For this reason such floor finishes can be omitted from the assessment.
The benefit of BIM enabled whole-building assessment is that the calculations are based on real design data and accurate
quantities, rather than generic specifications for particular building elements. IMPACT compliant tools also allow users to
accurately model the life cycle performance of primary structures and substructures, which are not covered by the Green
Guide to Specification.
IMPACT was developed by an industry consortium led by BRE. The work was funded by the UK’s Technology Strategy Board.
Further information about IMPACT and IMPACT compliant software tools (identified by the IMPACT compliant logo) is
available from www.impactwba.com
Facilitate the establishment of robust building level life cycle performance benchmarks in BREEAM. This will enable
future BREEAM versions to recognise and reward those designs which achieve above average performance.
Fulfil BREEAM Quality Assurance requirements
Conduct further research using data from real life projects.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 231
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Any data supplied to BRE Global will be treated in confidence and the use of BIM data for research purposes will ensure
individual projects are unidentifiable.
Please contact BRE Global at the earliest opportunity to establish equivalence status of a non-IMPACT compliant software
tool.
Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings
The Green Guide Online does not cover the potential health and wellbeing issues associated with flooring materials and
indoor air quality, this impact is covered in BREEAM issue Hea 02 Indoor air quality.
232 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
1At the time of publishing the pre-live version of this Scheme Document (March 2011) this Online Green Guide Calculator
functionality is not present.
2BS EN ISO 21930:2007 Sustainability in building construction. Environmental declaration of building products. BSi, 2007.
3BS EN ISO 14040:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Principles and framework. BSi, 2006
4BS EN ISO 14044:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Requirements and guidelines. BSi, 2006
5BS EN ISO 14025:2010, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations, Principles and
procedures. BSi, 2010.
6BS EN ISO 14020, Environmental labels and declarations - General principles. BSi, 2001.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 233
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard surfaces that have a
low environmental impact, taking account of the full life cycle of materials used.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit
1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and 80% of all boundary protection (by area) in the construction
zone achieves an A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification. Green Guide ratings for the specification
(s) of each element can be found at www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Compliance notes
CN1 Shell and core - Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
applicable Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment criteria assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Simple buildings - This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
applicable guidance on how to apply the criteria.
assessment criteria
Country specific
234 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Materials
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Green Guide Online When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, ratings
for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The rating will
therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the Green Guide
online.
CN5 Finding exact Green Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to
Guide ratings identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment.
Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the
appropriate rating.
CN6 Green Guide rating Where applicable, products with Environmental Profiles Certification can be used to
via Environmental demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a
Profile Certification “product specific” Green Guide rating and this rating can be used in the same way as
a generic Green Guide rating. See Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology for
more information.
CN7 Minor alteration of Where there is hard landscaping or boundary protection which is to remain as
existing elements existing, then provided no more than 20% of the total area of the existing hard
landscaping and boundary protection elements are subject to minor alterations,
repair or maintenance, these elements can be awarded an A+ rating for the
purposes of determining compliance with this issue.
CN8 No hard If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit must
landscaping or be assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element e.g. hard
boundary landscaping. Where the development has neither element, the credit can be
protection awarded.
CN9 Building façade Any part of an external building elevation (of either the assessed building or any
forming boundary other neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be
excluded from the assessment of this credit.
CN10 Existing natural Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other
features living barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis.
CN11 Prison buildings - The criteria for hard surfaces are applicable only to those areas outside of the
Secure Perimeter secure perimeter zone, but within the overall curtilage of the site. The criteria for
Zones/Areas boundary protection apply to all specifications within the secure perimeter zone
and external zone, including its borders and curtilage, i.e. the whole site. The criteria
DO NOT apply to the secure perimeter fence, wall or any other fencing subject to
security standards.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 235
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
All The Green Guide rating and element number As design stage
for the assessed specifications.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site and its boundary which is being
developed for the BREEAM assessed building and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Green Guide
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
Other information
None.
236 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of responsibly sourced materials for key building elements.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Pre-requisite
1. All timber used on the project is 'Legally harvested and traded timber'.
Note:
a. It is a minimum requirement for achieving a certified BREEAM rating certification (for any rating level)
that compliance with criterion 1 is confirmed.
b. For other materials there areno pre-requisite requirements at this stage.
3 TBC
2 TBC
1 TBC
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 237
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance is applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 A government A government licence e.g. a UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, can
licence be used to provide evidence of legally sourced timber but does not meet the
See criterion 1. definition of a third party timber certification scheme and so does not comply with
the responsible sourcing requirements of this issue.
CN5 Sustainable For design stage assessments where the principle contractor has not yet been
procurement plan appointed, a specification or a letter of intent from the party responsible for
See criterion 2. appointing the principal contractor must be provided confirming a requirement for
the principal contractor to have in place a sustainable procurement plan. Refer
toThe BREEAM evidential requirements section for more guidance on providing
letters of commitment.
CN6 Responsible A table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised under BREEAM,
sourcing their scope and associated tier levels can be found at www.TBC.com (TBC).
certification This table is reviewed on a regular basis and BREEAM Assessors must ensure they
schemes and their use the current table.
238 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials
tier levels
See criterion 3.
CN7 Checking Confirmation of manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from the
responsible relevant responsible sourcing scheme provider. Many of the organisations who
sourcing claims See administer certification schemes will, via their website, list companies and products
criterion 3. that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any such
certification. Some schemes, including BES 6001 via www.greenbooklive.com, will
provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turn be used
as evidence of compliance for this BREEAM issue.
CN8 Specified reused Reused materials specified for the development are considered equivalent to
materials materials covered by certification schemes that fall within tier (TBC) of the
See criterion 3. Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria.
CN9 Route 1 Step 2 under Route 1 requires all specifications for an applicable material type to
Percentage of have a valid certificate from the recognised scheme, for that material type to be
specification for the eligible to contribute toward achieving BREEAM credits. Recognising that in some
applicable material instances there may be a specification that does not have a responsible sourcing
to be responsibly certificate, provided at least 95% of the applicable material consists of
sourced. See Step 2 specifications covered by a recognised responsible sourcing scheme then the
in theMethodology applicable material type can still be considered eligible for contributing toward
section. achieving the credits. In such instances detailed calculations demonstrating the 95%
level are not required, provided the assessor is satisfied that the project information
shows that this level is exceeded. If there is reasonable doubt the assessor should
consider asking the project team for further information to verify and reference this
accordingly in their assessment report.
Methodology
There are two routes to demonstrating compliance with this issue. Either route may be followed for any situation:
Step 1
Identify from Table - 42Table - 42 the materials specified or present in and usedfor the construction of the building being
assessed. Where composite products (such as windows, doors, etc.) are present these must be broken down into constituent
materials. Only materials that make up significant majority (at least 80%) of the product must be considered.
Note : The list below is included for indicative purposes at present. The categorisation of materials is currently under review
and this list will be amended before the scheme is finalised
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 239
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1. Structural timber
2. In situ concrete
3. Precast concrete
4. Structural metals.
5. Cladding metals
6. Engineering bricks
7. Facing Bricks
8. Other ceramics (including clay tiles)
9. Fabric insulation
10. Building services insulation
1. Non-structural timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood,Oriented strand board (OSB),
Medium Density Fibreboard(MDF), chipboard and cement bonded particleboard)
2. Stone and gravel, including dressed and building stone
3. Gypsum
4. Cementitious materials: mortars, plasterboard, plaster, cementitious renders
5. Glass
6. Bituminous materials, including roofing membranes and asphalt
7. Plastics and polymers, including rubbers,Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM),Thermoplastic PolyOlefin (TPO),
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and VET roofing and other membranes and polymeric renders
8. Pavers (concrete, clay)
Step 2
For each material type identified as applicable in step 1, determine for each specification whether or not it is covered by a
BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate.
Ensure at least [number TBC ] materials from the bulk materials (relevant to the building) list have been responsibly sourced.
Visit webpage www.TBC.com (TBC) for the most up-to-date list of BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification
Schemes (see Additional information section), their scope and corresponding tier level.
To be eligible to contribute towards achieving BREEAM credits for responsible sourcing of materials, 'all specifications' (see
CN9 ) for the applicable material type must have a valid certificate from the recognised scheme.
Step 3
Using, determine the appropriate number of Responsible Sourcing BREEAM points for each applicable material type identified
in step 1 and deemed compliant in step 2.
Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM ‘responsible sourcing of
materials’ points.
Tier level Points for bulk materials Points for other materials
240 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials
Note:
1. The tier rank is determined based on the rigour of responsible sourcing demonstrated by the supplier
(s ) or manufacturer(s) of that material or element (through responsible sourcing certification schemes)
See CN6 for information on BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes and their
tier levels.
2. Where responsibly sourced materials within a single materials category fall into a mix of tier levels the
lower tier level must be considered for allocation of points.
Step 4
Determine the percentage of points achieved as a proportion of the points available. This percentage is then compared with
the credit allocation Table - 41 (see the assessment criteria section above) and the relevant number of credits awarded.
The points available are the sum of the number of applicable materials (determined in step 1) multiplied by the highest
number of points available for a Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme in the top tier level.
Evidence
All See ‘The BREEAM evidential requirements’ section for a list of general evidence types that can be
used to demonstrate compliance with the relevant criteria for this issue.
All A copy of the completed BREEAM Mat 03 calculator for the project.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
These are third party schemes evaluated and approved by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Please visit
www.TBC.com for information on the evaluation criteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of
schemes, including application and appeals.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 241
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
the transportation of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate
inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain of custody
certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion
with non-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forest
certification systems. See also definition of CITES below.
Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list
illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on
Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the
country/countries seeking to protect this species.
Composite material
Composite material can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with
significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level
within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render and
timber composites such as chipboardor particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber,
glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing.
Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on request subject to the
availability of such materials in the country concerned. The policy requires all timber and wood-derived products to be
from only:
1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources OR
2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) - licensed timber or equivalent sources.
Further information on the UK Government's Timber Procurement Policy and compliant responsible sourcing
certification schemes is available from the CPET (Central Point of Expertise on Timber) website www.cpet.org.uk/.
242 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials
Responsible sourcing
The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and
traceability of construction materials and components.
In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes.
Visit webpage www.link.com (TBC) for a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global
Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Reused materials
Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor
processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials).
Recycled material
Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing
before they can be used again. For further information please see Calculating and declaring recycled content in
construction products, 'Rules of Thumb' Guide (WRAP, 2008) www.wrap.org.uk
Tier levels
A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming
the basis for awarding points and credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 03. Visit webpage www.TBC.com (TBC) for a table
of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM
assessment.
Other information
To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates
compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings
range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 243
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products,
not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In
turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater
assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit:
www.greenbooklive.com
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC)
validity
A CPET document may be helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. See
www.cpet.org.uk.
244 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 04 Insulation Materials
Mat 04 Insulation
Number of credits available Minimum standards
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its
thermal properties
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 245
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN2 Simple buildings - This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
applicable guidance on how to apply the criteria.
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Insulation If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been
incorporated as manufactured offsite (in order to maximise material optimisation) e.g. a wall or
part of an off-site roof, and that element has been assessed as part of Mat 01, then for the purpose
manufactured of assessing the insulation for this BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should
element be used. The same rule applies to insulation that has a significant additional
function, such as providing supporting structure e.g. structural insulated panels
(SIPS). In the Green Guide the actual insulation will be listed within the element title,
rather than under the generic insulation category.
CN5 Building specific No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Methodology
Insulation index calculation
The Insulation Index is calculated using the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator which uses the following calculation methodology:
For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided
by each type of insulation is calculated as follows:
The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the relevant Green Guide point(s)
from the following table to give the Green Guide Rating corrected value:
A+ 3
A 2
246 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 04 Insulation Materials
B 1
C 0.5
D 0.25
E 0
To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of the Green Guide rating corrected values for all insulating elements is divided by the
sum of the volume weighted thermal resistance values (See example calculation below).
Note
a. Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the rating, area and conductivity
for each insulation type should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator and an average is
calculated (by volume).
b. Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate
rating.
c. Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of
or the whole life cycle, is available for an insulating material/product, this can be used to increase the
contribution of that material/product to the building’s Mat 04 performance See below for more detail.
Type 1 Walls
Area = 450m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.023 W/mK Green Guide rating = A (2 points)
Type 3 Roof
Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = A+ (3
points)
Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = B (1 point)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 247
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction/Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 8121/4777 = 1.7 (credit not
achieved)
Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material
Please refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology
Note: Step 1 of the Methodology outlined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 (the proportion of the total environmental impact
of the assessed element) is not applicable for this issue as the insulation is assessed as a single material in BREEAM issue
Mat 04 and not as part of a larger building element containing other materials (as in BREEAM issue Mat 01).
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1-2 Copy of the output from the BREEAM Mat 04 As design stage
calculator tool.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Green Guide
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
Insulation index
A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal properties of insulation products used in
the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating material.
Materials optimisation
Material optimisation means adopting a resource efficient approach to design which results in less material being
used in the design (i.e. lean design), and/or less waste is produced in the construction process, without compromising
the design concept. Whilst this assessment issue is focused on the embodied impact of the insulation material
specified, the design team should consider solutions that optimise the use of the material and therefore minimise
construction waste.See Mat 06 Material efficiency for more information.
248 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 04 Insulation Materials
Other information
None
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 249
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed elements of the building and landscape, therefore minimising
the frequency of replacement and maximising materials optimisation.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit
See Table - 45 under 'Checklists and tables' for list of applicable elements, environmental factors and material degradation
effects to consider.
250 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Materials
4. Glazing: windows,skylight
5. External doors
6. Railings/Balusters (where exposed to external environment)
7. Cladding (where exposed to external environment)
8. Staircase/ramps (where exposed to external environment)
9. Hard landscaping
Environmental factors
Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following)
1. Corrosion
2. Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage
3. Fading/discolouration
4. Rotting
5. Leaching
6. Blistering
7. Melting
8. Salt crystallisation
9. Abrasion
Compliance notes
CN1 Shell and core - Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage - Criterion 1
applicable Where vulnerable elements identified form part of the shell and core developer’s
assessment criteria remit.
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply and must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue.
Where vulnerable elements identified are internal and do not form a part of the
shell and core developer's remit, i.e. they are in speculative areas and compliance is
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 251
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
CN2 Simple buildings - This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
applicable guidance on how to apply the criteria.
assessment criteria
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Suitable durability Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building can
measures See include:
criterion 1 1. Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas
2. Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high
3. Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-2 1 and, for
healthcare buildings, see CN8.2
4. Protection rails to walls of corridors
5. Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc) on doors
6. Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation
areas (i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc)
7. Designing out the risk without the need for additional materials specification
to protect vulnerable areas.
CN5 Vehicle impact Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an
protection See adequate distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any
criterion 1c vehicle with a measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in particular
for any goods delivery areas.
In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall
construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must be
provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from vehicle
movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails.
CN6 Preventing excessive The specification or design measures chosen should reflect the need to balance the
material use additional specification of materials with the need to protect building elements to
minimise their replacement, insuring against excessive material use and promoting
materials optimisation.
252 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Materials
CN8 Healthcare : The following lists the Standards or/ Building Regulations etc. relevant for the
Suitable durability provision of durability measures for corridor walls
measures for England
corridor walls Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, Department of Health, 2013
Norhtern Ireland
same as England.
Wales
Welsh Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, NHS Wales, 2014 3
Scotland
Scottish Health Technical Memorandum 58: Partitions, NHS National Services
Scotland, 2006 4
.
Methodology
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation
The following outlines the process to assess criterion 2.
1. Identify from the list of ‘applicable building elements’ under Table - 45 the elements that are appropriate to the building
being assessed.
2. Establish from the ‘environmental factors’ list those factors that are likely to cause material degradation effects in the
identified applicable building elements.
3. Confirm the design and specification measures in place to limit these degradation effects.
4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the measures proposed are appropriate
in terms of demonstrating compliance and meeting the aim of the criterion/issue.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Materials efficiency
Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 04 Insulation
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 253
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Other information
None
1BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and robustness
including methods of test, BSI1992.
2Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, Department of Health, 2013
3Welsh Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, NHS Wales, 2014
4Scottish Health Technical Memorandum 58: Partitions, NHS National Services Scotland, 2006
254 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 06 Material efficiency Materials
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures to optimise material efficiency in order to minimise environmental impact of material
use and waste.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to show compliance for:
One credit
1. Opportunities and measures to optimise the use of materials in building design, procurement, construction,
maintenance and end of life have been identified,investigated and implemented by the design/construction team as
appropriate in consultation with the relevant parties (see CN4) at each of the following RIBA stages:
a. Preparation and Brief
b. Concept Design
c. Development Design
d. Technical Design
e. Construction
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment criteria Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 255
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Relevant parties All parties involved in the design, specification and/or construction of the building
should be consulted. This includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Client/developer
2. Cost consultant
3. Architect
4. Engineers - Structural,civil
5. Building services engineer - mechanical, electrical
6. Principal contractor
7. Demolition/strip out contractor
8. Environmental consultant
9. Project management consultant
10. Materials/component manufacturers/suppliers
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Material efficiency
The process of undertaking a building project to enable the most efficient use of materials over the lifecycle of the
building and its component. This includes using fewer materials, reusing existing demolition/strip-out materials and,
where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of recycled content 1 It may also include the adoption of
alternative means of design/construction that result in lower materials usage and lower wastage levels including off-
site manufacture and use of pre-assembled service pods.
256 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Mat 06 Material efficiency Materials
Other information
The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% is used to make five stock materials- steel (25%),
cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and aluminium (3%).
BS 8895
Designing for material efficiency in buildings projects - Part 1 : Code of practice for Strategic Definition and Preparation and
Brief standard outlines specific material efficiency process, key tasks, team members and their responsibilities and outputs
specific to each RIBA Work Stage along with supporting guidance and tools. This serves as a useful tool to assist the design
team in developing and implementing material efficiency strategies for their developments.
WRAP
Designing out Waste: A design team guide for buildings. This standard outlines five principles of designing out waste and can
be applied during design development, and serve as prompts for investigating opportunities for material efficiency in design.
1BS 8895: Designing for material efficiency in building projects- Part1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and
Preparation and Brief. BSI, 2013.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 257
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Waste
258 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste
4 Yes
Aim
To promote resource efficiency via the effective management and reduction of construction waste.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
BREEAM credits Amount of waste generated per 100m2 (gross internal floor area)
m3 tonnes
3. Where existing buildings on the site will be demolished a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or
hard surfaces is completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible and, if not, to
maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high-grade/value applications. The audit must be
referenced in the CRMP and cover:
a. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials.
b. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition
materials in accordance with the waste hierarchy.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 259
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
5. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups see Table - 48 (according to the waste streams
generated by the scope of the works) either onsite or offsite through a licensed contractor for recovery.
6. Non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s design and on-site construction and off-site
manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste) is no greater than the exemplary level resource
efficiency benchmark (outlined in Table - 46).
7. The percentage of non-hazardous construction (onsite and offsite manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation
waste (if relevant) diverted from landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmark (outlined in Table -
47).
8. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the CRMP.
This data must be reported at the final post-construction stage of the BREEAM assessment, via the BREEAM assessment
and reporting process (in addition to any other internal or external reporting of the data that may occur). Note: where
existing buildings on the site will be demolished, a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard
surfaces must be completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible. If the audit finds
that this is not feasible, then its purpose is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high-
grade/value applications. The audit must be referenced and cover:
260 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Construction The project waste arisings should be recorded and include construction, demolition
Resource and excavation waste. Note that the performance benchmarks for the award of
Management Plan credits do not include demolition and excavation waste.
records
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 261
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN5 Limited site space Where space onsite is too limited to allow materials to be segregated, a waste
for segregation and contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials offsite.
storage See criterion Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where this is the
5. case, evidence must be produced which demonstrates that segregation of
materials is carried out to the agreed levels and that materials are reused/recycled
as appropriate. Such evidence could be Environment Agency / Scottish Environment
Protection Agency / Environment Agency Wales / Northern Ireland Environment
Agency Waste Return Forms.
CN6 Waste from Any waste generated onsite for the purposes of the development (excluding
temporary support demolition and excavation waste) must be taken account of in the assessment of
structures this issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials/system brought
onsite to facilitate construction of a building, enter the waste stream (albeit for
recycling), then they will need to be classified as construction waste and therefore
contribute to the construction waste benchmark necessary to facilitate assessment
with this issue.
If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on
other sites, then it hasn’t been discarded and therefore doesn’t enter the waste
stream. Thus wouldn’t be included in the waste generated and hence the
benchmark figures for this issue. The same would apply to timber formwork where
re-used.
CN7 Waste from offsite Where a system manufactured offsite is being used on the project, the
manufacturing manufacturer will need to supply the amount of waste generated during the
assembly of that system within the factory environment. The total amount of waste
generated needs to be reported per 10 m2 of the assembled system. This must
then be added to the waste generated onsite to determine the overall project
construction waste generated.
Methodology
Work packages
For the simple building exemplary criteria, the waste arisings need to be associated with the source of waste by project work
packages. These work packages could include
1. Asbestos removal
2. External and site works Fixtures and fittings
3. Groundworks and excavation
4. Refurbishment
5. Remediation
6. Re-roofing
7. Services
8. Soft strip
9. Substructure
10. Superstructure
262 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
The aim of the CRMP is to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency
includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use,
reuse and recycling of materials and products on and off the site.
A compliant CRMP is one that defines:
1. A target benchmark for resource efficiency, i.e. m3 of waste per 100m2 or tonnes of waste per 100m2
2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the target benchmark
3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste
4. A waste minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken
5. Procedures for estimating, monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste. If
waste data is obtained from licensed external waste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable, e.g.
by using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA Waste Return Forms
6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups (see additional
guidance section), either on site or through a licensed external contractor
7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan
8. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 263
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Waste hierarchy
The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in
descending order of environmental preference in The Waste (England and Wales) Regulation 2011 1 as:
Prevention
Re-use
Recycle
Recover
Dispose.
Waste Minimisation
This term encompasses two elements of the waste hierarchy:
Waste reduction/prevention = using less material in design, manufacture and installation, keeping products for
longer, using no hazardous materials
Reuse = using products again for the same purpose for which they were conceived, which may require checking,
cleaning or repairing (preparing for reuse).
Types of waste minimisation actions include:
1. Set and report against waste reduction targets
2. Design for standardisation of components
3. Avoid waste from excavation/groundworks and consider opportunities for zero cut and fill
4. Return packaging for reuse
5. Consider community reuse of surplus/off-cuts
6. Include waste minimisation initiatives and targets in tenders/contracts and engage with the supply chain
7. Consider use of BIM (Building Information Modelling)
8. Design for offsite/modular build
9. Design for flexibility, adaptability and future deconstruction
10. Design to use fewer materials
11. Use of reusable temporary elements such as shuttering and protection.
This list is not exhaustive and other waste minimisation actions can be taken.
170101 Concrete Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ
264 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste
1501 Packaging Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands,
polythene sheets
1602 Electrical and electronic Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps
equipment equipment
170103 Tiles and ceramics Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware
Most relevant Hazardous Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste
EWC Catalogue (EWC)
170904 (Mixed) Mixed/other Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories
wherever possible
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 265
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Other information
1. One credit: Performance in the top 50% of projects (better than standard practice)
2. Two credits: Performance in the top 25% of projects (good practice)
3. Three credits: Performance in the top 10% of projects (best practice)
4. Exemplary level: Performance in the top 5% of projects (exemplary practice).
Why does BREEAM exclude demolition and excavation waste from the resource efficiency benchmarks?
BREEAM does not include demolition and excavation (D&E) waste in its resource efficiency benchmark, despite it often being
the largest tonnage of waste onsite, because the amount of D&E waste produced is site-dependant. Furthermore, it is not
necessarily possible to reduce the amount of demolition waste (unless a decision is taken not to demolish in the first place).
1. Not encourage sites with unavoidably large amounts of D&E waste to focus on reducing waste arising from
construction materials (which would have further knock-on environmental impacts); and
2. Mean that sites with little or no D&E waste would find compliance with the benchmark more straight forward, which
would weaken the drivers for reducing construction waste resulting from the specification and use of new building
materials.
BREEAM aims to ensure that, where D&E waste is generated, it is diverted from landfill and where possible reused for high
grade use onsite to reduce the volume of new materials produced/required in the supply chain (which themselves may go on
to generate additional waste). One credit and an exemplary level credit are available where it can be demonstrated that D&E
waste has been diverted from landfill.
SMARTWaste® Construction is frequently updated and offers a greater level of flexibility, reporting and support. Templates
are available to meet the latest BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded.
SMARTWaste Plan is a free version of the tool that can be used to manage all aspects of creating SWMPs and measuring
waste generated on projects. The free tool is occasionally updated, only providing support up to BREEAM 2008, and does not
support the measuring and reporting on energy/fuel/water use or timber procurement.
Other tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a CRMP are available from the Waste and Resources Action
Programme (WRAP) www.wrap.org.uk.
266 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste
For the WRAP/UKCG method, only materials taken offsite as waste are to be recorded as waste. It is optional to record data
for materials that are reused onsite but these should not be reported.
The WRAP/UKCG method also has default diversion from landfill rates for waste sent offsite to waste destinations. For
example, it is assumed that 50% of inert soil and stones (EWC 17 05 04) and brick, concrete, tiles and ceramics (EWC 17 01 01,
EWC 17 01 02, EWC 17 01 03, and EWC 17 01 07) sent to landfill will go to beneficial reuse (e.g. landfill engineering and
restoration). SMARTWaste and BREEAM do not make this assumption.
1The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, Environmental Protection, England and Wales, Statutory Instrument No.
988.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 267
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, thereby reducing the demand for virgin material
and optimising material efficiency in construction.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Bound
Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for 30% 75%
paved areas and roads
Unbound
Granular fill and capping (see Relevant definitions section) 100% N/A
268 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Waste
2. The total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate specified, and meeting criterion 1, is greater than 25% (by
weight or volume) of the total high-grade aggregate specified for the development. Where the minimum level in
criterion 1 is not met for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate
when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified.
3. The recycled and/or secondary aggregates are EITHER:
a. Construction, demolition and excavation waste obtained onsite or offsite OR
b. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer industrial by-product source (see
Relevant definitions section).
4. The percentage of high-grade aggregate, that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate, specified in each application
(present) must meet the exemplary minimum levels (by weight or volume), as defined in the table above. Where this
minimum level is not met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when
calculating the total high grade aggregate specified.
5. Where the total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate specified is greater than 35% (by weight or volume)
of the total high-grade aggregate specified for the project. Where the minimum level in criterion1 is not met for an
application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total
high grade aggregate specified.
6. The contributing secondary aggregate must not be transported more than 30 km by road transport.
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment criteria Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 269
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN4 Offsite recycled Where offsite recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation
aggregates waste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant Quality Protocol
and/or comply with the relevant BS/EN standards for aggregates.
Methodology
None
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
270 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Waste
Materials optimisation
Mat 04 Insulation
Quality Protocol
The purpose of a Quality Protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can
reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also
provides purchasers with a product quality-managed to common standards, which increases confidence in
performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a Quality Protocol and/or relevant aggregate
standards will still be considered waste.
Protocols exists for:
Aggregates produced from inert waste
Use of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications.
Recycled aggregates
Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed
concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material.
Secondary aggregates
By-products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary
aggregates are sub-divided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source.
Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by-products include:
1. China clay waste
2. Slate overburden
3. Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)
4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS)
5. Air-cooled blast furnace slag
6. Steel slag
7. Furnace Bottom Ash (FBA)
8. Incinerator bottom ash
9. Foundry sands
10. Recycled glass
11. Recycled plastic
12. Spent oil shale
13. Colliery spoil
14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 271
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Other information
Further guidance
Details on the European Standards for Aggregates (2004) are available at:
http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/quality/aggregates_standards/european.html
http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/sectors/142481.aspx
Currently:
The Quality Protocol for production of aggregates from inert waste is due for re-publication in
2013.http://www2.wrap.org.uk/downloads/0083_Quality_Protocol_A4.0bd6bd91.87.pdf
Steel slag, incinerator bottom ash aggregates and furnace bottom ash (from coal fired power generation) are not
covered by the above Quality Protocol but are/will be covered by their own quality protocols.
WRAP has information, tools and guidance on the use of recycled and secondary aggregates:http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/
272 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 03 Operational waste Waste
1 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable waste
streams, so that this waste is diverted from landfill or incineration.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
1WHTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste, NHW Wales Shared Services Partnership - Facilities Services, 2013
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 273
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with individual bedrooms and communal facilities only
5. The above storage requirements (criterion 4) for self-contained dwellings/bedsits are met for every six bedrooms
6. The recyclable storage is located in a dedicated non obstructive position in either:
a. Communal kitchens; OR
b. Where there are no communal kitchens present, in a communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas.
7. Home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet is provided within the kitchen area or
communal space for each self contained dwelling, bedsit or communal kitchen.
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. All criteria relevant to the
assessment criteria building type and function apply.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to this
building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Determining if the The design team demonstrates that the provision of waste management facilities
dedicated space for the assessed building is adequate given the building type, occupier (if known),
274 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 03 Operational waste Waste
complies See criteria operational function and likely waste streams and volumes to be generated.
1 and 2. Where it is not possible to determine what provision should be made, the following
guide for minimum storage space provision should be used:
1. At least 2m2 per 1000 m2 of net floor area for buildings < 5000 m2
2. A minimum of 10 m2 for buildings ≥ 5000 m2
3. An additional 2 m2 per 1000 m2 of net floor area where catering is provided
(with an additional minimum of 10 m2 for buildings ≥ 5000 m2).
The net floor area should be rounded up to the nearest 1000m2.
CN5 Extensions to Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to assess
existing buildings compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for the total
volume of predicted recyclable waste arising from the new and existing buildings.
CN6 Multiple building Where the assessment applies to one or more buildings/units that are part of a
assessments and wider estate or campus, the design team can choose to demonstrate compliance
buildings that form through the provision of dedicated centralised storage space and waste
part of a wider management facilities with the capacity to accommodate the recyclable waste
estate See criterion material generated from all buildings and their activities.
1c.
CN7 Limited space or For developments that have limited space for static installations, compliance can be
vehicle access for a assessed on the basis of the provision of adequate space for a smaller portable
compactor/baler compactor or baler.
See criterion 2.
CN8 Internal storage Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and
areas manoeuvring and loading space must be sized to ensure ease of access for vehicles
collecting recyclable materials.
CN9 General waste The area for storage of recyclable materials must be provided in addition to areas
and facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste
management facilities, e.g. compactors, balers and composters.
CN10 Small industrial units For an industrial building or development consisting of a number of smaller units,
See criterion 1. each ≤ 200m2 floor area, shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the
building/development as a whole are sufficient to achieve this credit.
CN11 Shopping centres For shopping centres and retail parks there must be adequate space to cater for
and retail parks each tenant and their potential recyclable waste volumes. Tenants that occupy a
See criterion 1. large proportion of the centre, i.e. ‘flagship tenants’, must have their own dedicated
compliant facilities. For smaller non-flagship tenant units, compliant central or
common facilities onsite or dedicated spaces for individual units will meet the
assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 275
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Building specific
CN13 Multi-residential: Where it is not possible to locate the recycling bins within a communal area, which is
supported living accessible to residents, for safety reasons (e.g. where the residents have mental
facility health problems and free access to these facilities would pose significant risk of self
harm or harm to others) it is acceptable to locate them within a dedicated non-
obtrusive position accessible to staff only, but in close proximity to the areas where
recyclable waste material is generated.
Methodology
None
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Accessible space
Accessible space is typically within 20 m of a building entrance. Depending on the size of the building, site restrictions
or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible for the facilities to be within 20 m of a building entrance. In such
circumstances, judgement on whether the space is ‘accessible’ to the building occupants and vehicle collection must
be made.
Clinical waste
Waste derived from medical practices and defined as bodily fluids and wastes, drugs and medical equipment; and
other waste which, unless rendered safe, may prove hazardous or infectious to persons coming into contact with it.
276 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 03 Operational waste Waste
Other information
Recyclable storage
The following footprint dimensions (informed by the Metric handbook, Planning and design data) can act as a guide when
determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space:
1. Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4 m
2. Skip: the footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4 m x 1.8 m, therefore allow a minimum of 2.0 m width and
4.0 m length or 8 m2 area for the storage and access of such containers
3. Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86 m x 0.62/660 L= 1.2 m x 0.7 m/1100 L = 1.28 m x 0.98 m
4. Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1 m x 2.4 m
5. Vehicle access: the following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste. Therefore gate
height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements:
a. Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4 m Height = 4 m width 3.1 m
b. Skip lorry: length = 7 m Height = 3.35 m width 3.1 m.
Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll on/off
containers.
Recycling bins
Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise recycling rates.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 277
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To encourage the specification and fitting of floor and ceiling finishes selected by the building occupant and therefore avoid
unnecessary waste of materials.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Option 1- Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
assessment criteria option.
Option 2- Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
278 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Waste
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
General
Building specific
CN5 Office: Show area A show area could be either a floor plate or an individual office. However, to award
See criterion 1. this credit it must be less than 25% of the net lettable floor area.
Methodology
None
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
None
Other information
None
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 279
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to mitigate the impact of extreme weather conditions arising from climate
change over the lifespan of the building.
Assessment criteria
A number of BREEAM issues within the New Construction scheme contain assessment criteria which aim to support mitigation
of the impacts of extreme weather events arising from climate change. The main credit focuses on structural and fabric
resilience not covered in other issues. An Exemplary Credit is awarded where other issues relating to adaptation to climate
change are covered holistically.
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
1. Achievement of the Structural and fabric resilience issue and following issues and the following criteria points or credits:
280 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Waste
Compliance notes
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 281
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
General
CN4 Relevant bodies This includes but is not limited to the following:
See criterion 2.
Local authorities
Statutory bodies e.g. Defra, EA, NIEA, SEPA etc
Technical bodies e.g. CIBSE, UKCIP
Methodology
Hazard identification
1. Review the evidence/information from relevant bodies to identify and understand the expected impacts of increased
extreme weather events climate change for on the building.
2. Identify likely hazards (see Relevant definitions).
Hazard assessment
1. Identify the scale of the hazards identified.
Risk estimation
1. Identify the risk presented by these hazards to the building and the likely impact of the hazards taking into account the
following aspects as a minimum:
a. Structural stability
b. Structural robustness
c. Weather proofing and detailing
d. Material durability
e. Health and safety of building occupants and others
f. Impacts on building contents and business continuity
Risk evaluation
1. Evaluate the potential impact of these risks on the building
2. Determine the tolerable risk threshold
3. Check the sensitivity of the risk assessment
4. Identify areas where the risks are unacceptable in health and safety, life cycle assessment and financial terms
Risk management
1. Identify risk reduction measures
2. Mitigate the hazards where as far as is practically feasible.
3. Adapt the design/specification to incorporate the measures identified by the risk assessment in the final design.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
282 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Waste
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Durability
The ability to withstand wear, pressure, or damage.
Hazard
A hazard is a situation or event which has the potential to cause harm. It may be an accidental or a malicious action,
insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation from intended limits
Resilience
The ability of a building or structural system or material to withstand an accidental or exceptional loading or other
incident without experiencing an undue degree of damage or decrease in performance, such that progressive
collapse, loss of performance or disproportionate degree of damage occurs.
Other information
This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to mitigate the future impacts of climate change on the
building by considering a number of relevant factors during the design stages. BRE have avoided being overly-prescriptive
with the assessment criteria in order to allow a degree of flexibility in its application and demonstrating compliance,
recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by
site location and building specific factors. This places a greater emphasis on the BREEAM Assessor to use their judgement in
determining whether the project team and the building design has met the aim and intent of the credit and its criteria, using
appropriate project information to back their judgement. BRE will endorse the BREEAM Assessors judgement through the
Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of project team actions and
proposed design solutions is evident. BRE would welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist
with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions.
The National Adaptation Programme1 report has been drawn up by the government, industry and other non-government
organisations working together. It contains a mix of policies and actions to help the UK to adapt successfully to future
weather conditions, by dealing with the risks and making the most of the opportunities.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 283
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The book "Design for climate change"2 describes buildings and issues as part of the Design for Future Climate, Adapting
Buildings programme, the largest programme focusing on the climate-change adaptation of buildings in the UK. This
programme from the Technology Strategy Board (TSB) is aimed at improving the climate resilience of building projects. The
book has guidance on construction, including structural stability.
The BRE report 3, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment, discusses climate change adaptation
strategies, including some for structural resilience.
The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.
284 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 06 Functional adaptability Waste
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to accommodatefuture changes of use of the building over its lifespan.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 285
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Functional The content of the functional adaptation implementation plan will be specific to the
adaptation building type, but should broadly include information on the following:
implementation 1. The feasibility for multiple/alternative building uses and area functions
plan 2. Options for multiple building uses and area functions
3. Routes and methods for major plant replacement
4. Accessibility for local plant and service distribution routes
5. Potential for the building to be extended, horizontally and/or vertically
6.
Methodology
None
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
All Functional adaptation strategy and implementation As per design stage evidence
plan report
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Functional adaptability
The ability of a building to be adapted to be used as a different building type or for different requirements.
286 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Wst 06 Functional adaptability Waste
Other information
The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 4 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.
1National Adaptation Programme: Making the country resilient to a changing climate. Defra; 2013
2Gething B, Puckett K, Design for climate change. RIBA; 2013
3Graves HM, Phillipson MC, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment. BRE Centre for Environmental
Engineering: BRE East Kilbride; 2000
4Health Technical Memorandum 07-07: Sustainable health and social care buildings. Department of Health; 2013
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 287
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
288 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 01 Site selection Land Use and Ecology
LE 01 Site selection
Number of credits available Minimum standards
2 No
Aim
To encourage the use of previously occupied and/or contaminated land and avoid land which has not been previously
disturbed.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 289
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable . This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Temporary works Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary
See criterion 1. offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as development
on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations unless they have
been defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (LE 02 Ecological value of site and
protection of ecological features).
CN5 Infill development New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not automatically
See criterion 1. comply with the re-use of land criteria. At least 75% of the land on which the new
building will be sited must meet the definition of previously occupied (for prisons,
refer to the building type specific compliance note below).
CN6 Prior The credit for use of contaminated land can only be awarded where remediation
decontamination has taken place to enable development of the site for the assessed building, or a
See criteria 2 and 3. larger phased development that includes the assessed building (see below). The
credit is not achievable for instances where historical remediation and development
of the site has occurred outside the scope of the current development proposals.
CN7 Large sites split into Where contamination of a large site has been remediated and has then been
smaller plots packaged up into smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a
See criteria 2 and 3. phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot
location of the assessed building within the wider development plan. This is on the
condition that the site could not have been developed without remediation work
taking place.
CN8 Health and safety Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety
related reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does not comply.
decontamination
See criteria 2 and 3.
CN9 Asbestos Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within an existing
See criteria 2 and 3. building fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where
asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination
for the purposes of assessing this issue.
290 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 01 Site selection Land Use and Ecology
Building specific
CN10 Education (schools Development of a playing field within the construction zone can be counted as
only) development on previously occupied land only if an equivalent area of playing field
Playing fields is reinstated within one year of the completed construction works; and where such
See criterion 1. reinstatement will not encroach on land of high ecological value as defined in
BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
CN11 Prisons All land within a secure perimeter fence on an existing prison site can be classified as
See criterion 1. previously occupied land. Therefore assessments of buildings located within this
area will achieve the credit.
If the secure perimeter fence of a prison is being extended to accommodate the
proposed building, or the proposed building is located on a completely new site,
then the building must comply with the assessment criteria defined above.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being
developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, soft landscape, site access, plus a 3m wide zone
measured outward from the boundary. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings.
If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be located it must be
assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.
Contaminant
A contaminant is defined as any solid, liquid or gaseous material in, or on the ground to be covered by the building,
which is classed as a hazard and therefore presents an unacceptable risk to human health and the environment. The
definition also includes land significantly infested by non-native invasive plant species (see definition below).
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 291
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Pollution linkages
A relevant pollutant linkage is one that has been identified during the risk assessment stage as representing
unacceptable risks to human health or the environment.
Proposed development
Any development (building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads) that falls within the boundary of the
assessed site.
Remediation
Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human
health, the environment or local resources such as sources of potable water.
Significant contamination
For the purposes of this issue, significant contamination is contamination compliant with the above definition of
contaminant and that which without remediation, development of the site is not possible.
Other information
None.
292 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Land Use and Ecology
ecological features
Number of credits available Minimum standards
2 No
Aim
To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing ecological features from
substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction works.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
OR
b. A Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’ within an ecological
assessment report, based on a site survey.
The checklist should be completed by either the BREEAM Assessor, using appropriate evidence submitted by the design team
or completed by the design team and submitted to the assessor along with appropriate supporting evidence. The answers
to the checklist must be based on an evaluation of the site prior to any site clearance or construction activities (refer to
Compliance notes for further details).
1BS 42020: 2013: Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning and Development, BSI 2013
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 293
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value
ID Question Yes No
Notes:
* The Countryside Survey defines woodland as ‘having over 25% canopy cover of trees and shrubs, over a metre high’.
Broad-leaved woodland should be taken to mean broad-leaved, mixed and Yew woodland.
** The Countryside Survey defines the broad habitats of rivers and streams as running watercourses ranging from small
headwater streams to large rivers. This broad habitat, along with wetlands, includes the open water itself and the
vegetation along the water’s edge.
*** The Countryside Survey defines a hedge as ‘a line of woody vegetation that has been subject to management so that
trees no longer take their natural shape.’
http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/
294 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Land Use and Ecology
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.y.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
guidance
General
CN4 No features of The credit for the protection of ecological features can be awarded where the
ecological value construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ and where the
See criterion 1. surrounding site contains no features of ecological value.
CN5 Use of a Suitably Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is employed and has, using their
Qualified Ecologist professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this
See criterion 1. assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using the BREEAM
checklist for defining land of low ecological value. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist
must base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at
appropriate time(s) of the year, when different plant and animal species are
evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing
site’s ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e.
before RIBA Stage 5 Construction). Where the ecologist has not visited the site at
the appropriate times the credit cannot be awarded (except in the circumstances
indicated below in the Compliance note 'Site clearance prior to purchase of the
site'). See Additional Information for the BREEAM definition of a Suitably Qualified
Ecologist (SQE).
CN6 Features of little or If a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has confirmed that a feature present on the site has
no ecological value little or no ecological value, or where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger
See criterion 1. to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then
that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological features'
requirement of this issue.
CN7 Prior removal of If features of ecological value have been removed as part of the site clearance
features of activities then the development cannot achieve the credits, even if they are to be
ecological value replaced as part of a new soft landscape strategy.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 295
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN8 Site clearance prior For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years before
to purchase of the assessment, a Suitably Qualified Ecologist should estimate the site’s ecological value
site immediately prior to clearance using available desktop information (including aerial
See criterion 1 and 2. photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the site. Where it is not
possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value
prior to the site clearance then the credits must be withheld, i.e. where there is no
evidence and therefore justification for awarding the credits. For sites cleared more
than five years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be based on the current
situation on the basis that within five years, ecological features would have started
to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological
value.
CN9 Verification of a Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by
report written by an another ecologist who does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum,
ecologist not review the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to:
meeting the 1. Represent sound industry practice
BREEAM SQE criteria 2. Report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively
See criterion 1b. 3. Be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed
4. aAoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with
the definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is not employed: As per interim design stage.
BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological
value.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone
As defined for BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection.
296 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Land Use and Ecology
Peer review
A peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current
full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of
conduct and professional ethics.
Other information
Very often there is the potential for a site to increase its biodiversity value through appropriate design and management,
regardless of whether enhancing biodiversity is required to gain planning consent. This BREEAM assessment issue provides
the opportunity to reward those projects that contribute to protecting and enhancing biodiversity, improve living
environments and meet environmental objectives.
Whilst not mandatory, BREEAM recommends that a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is appointed to ensure that a project
maximizes biodiversity gains. Although a large number of developments are not required to undertake formal ecological
assessments as part of the planning process because of the nature of the existing site, they may have potential to be of
biodiversity value. Verification of this is best achieved by the appointment of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
The Suitably Qualified Ecologist’s recommendations may impact on specifications worked-up by other design team
members, such as landscape architects or drainage engineers. BREEAM recommends that collaborative input between the
ecologist and relevant professionals is sought from the concept stage of the development to highlight opportunities and
constraints and allow effective integration of these aspects into the ecologist’s recommendations.
1BS 5837: 2012: Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction - Recommendations, BSI 2012
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 297
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Organisations and institutes, including the Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) and the
Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC), provide lists of ecologists working within a particular region that may meet
the SQE requirements.
Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This
information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
298 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Land Use and Ecology
2 Yes
Aim
To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
OR
b. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) has been appointed and, based on their site survey, they confirm the
following and either the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator:
i. The broad habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and
proposed state.
ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat plot types.
iii. Average total taxon (plant species) richness within each habitat type.
Acid grassland Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on a range of lime-deficient soils which have been
derived from acidic bedrock or from superficial deposits such as sands and gravels. They
characteristically include a range of calcifuge or ‘lime-avoiding’ plants.
Arable and Includes all arable crops such as different types of cereal and vegetable crops, together with
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 299
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
horticultural orchards and more specialist operations such as market gardening and commercial flower
growing. Freshly ploughed land, fallow areas, short-term set-aside and annual grass leys are also
included in this category.
Boundary and This habitat includes a diverse range of linearly arranged landscape features such as hedgerows,
linear features lines of trees (whether they are part of a hedgerow or not), walls, stone and earth banks, grass
strips and dry ditches. These features may occur separately or in combinations forming multi-
element boundaries. This habitat type also includes some of the built components of the rural
landscape, including roads, tracks and railways. The narrow strips of semi-natural vegetation
along verges or cuttings are also included.
Bracken Stands of vegetation greater than 0.25 ha in extent which are dominated by a continuous canopy
cover (> 95% cover) of bracken (Pteridium aquilinum) at the height of the growing season.
Built-up and Covers urban and rural settlements, farm buildings, caravan parks and other man-made built
gardens structures such as industrial estates, retail parks, waste and derelict ground, urban parkland and
urban transport infrastructure. It also includes domestic gardens and allotments.
This category has been split in to three individual broad habitat categories for the purpose of
BREEAM:
1. Gardens, allotments and urban parkland
2. Built-up (maintained buildings and infrastructure)
3. Derelict land (where the land was previously used for major historical industrial use or
development).
This split is to reflect the differing impact of development in these types of habitats.
Broadleaved, This form of woodland is dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which
mixed and yew form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy with a cover of greater than 20%. It includes
woodland stands of native broad leaved trees (such as oak, ash and beech), non-native broad leaved trees
(such as sycamore and horse chestnut), and yew trees, where the percentage cover of these
trees in the stand exceeds 20% of the total cover of the trees present. Scrub vegetation, where
the woody component tends to be mainly shrubs (usually less than 5m high), is included if the
cover of woody species is greater than 30%.
Calcareous Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on shallow, well-drained soils, which are alkaline, as
grassland a result of the weathering of chalk, limestone or other types of base-rich rock. They
characteristically include a range of calcicoles or ‘lime-loving’ plants.
Coniferous Dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct, although
woodland sometimes open, canopy which has a cover of greater than 20%. It includes stands of both native
conifers (Scots pine but not yew) and non-native conifers (such as larch and Sitka spruce) where
the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 80% of the total cover of the trees
present.
Mixed woodland This is not a category in its own right, but has been included separately by BRE Global for
clarification.
Many areas of woodland contain both broad leaved and coniferous trees. There is not a
separate Broad Habitat for mixed woodland. Instead where mixtures occur they are assigned to
the Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew Broad Habitat type if the proportion of conifers is less than
80%.
300 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Land Use and Ecology
The separation of coniferous from Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew habitat is applied at a stand or
sub-compartment level within large woodlands to avoid areas that are predominantly
coniferous being treated as mixed because they are part of a larger wood, of which 20%
consists of pure broadleaved trees. Therefore, most areas of mixed woodland that are assigned
to the Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew Broad Habitat would normally have much more than 20%
broad leaved or yew trees.
Dwarf shrub heath Vegetation that has a greater than 25% cover of plant species from the heath family or dwarf
gorse species. It generally occurs on well-drained, nutrient-poor, acid soils.
Improved Occurs on fertile soils and is characterised by the dominance of a few fast-growing species, such
grassland as rye-grass and white clover. These grasslands are typically used for grazing and silage, but they
can also be managed for recreational purposes. They are often intensively managed using
fertiliser and weed control treatments, and may also be ploughed as part of the normal rotation
of arable crops but if so, they are only included in this Broad Habitat type if they are more than
one year old.
Inland rock Habitat types that occur on both natural and artificial exposed rock surfaces, such as inland cliffs,
caves, screes and limestone pavements, as well as various forms of excavations and waste tips,
such as quarries and quarry waste.
Neutral grassland Found on soils that are neither very acid nor alkaline. They support different types of vegetation
communities compared to Acid and Calcareous Grasslands in that they do not contain calcifuge
(‘lime-avoiding’) plants which are found on acid soils, or calcicole (lime-loving) plants which are
found on calcareous soils. Unimproved or semi-improved Neutral grasslands may be managed
as hay meadows, pastures or for silage. They differ from Improved grassland in that they are less
fertile and contain a wider range of herb and grass species. Usually the cover of rye grass is less
than about 25%.
Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels
plots’ in Great Britain.
Habitat type Previously Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & ***
undeveloped (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and
land therefore derelict)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 301
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Habitat type Previously Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & ***
undeveloped (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and
land therefore derelict)
Bracken 19.29 - - - -
Source: Acknowledgement - Countryside Survey data owned by NERC – Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. Countryside
Survey © Database Right/Copyright NERC– Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. All rights reserved.
*Total taxon richness is higher plant species only, no bryophytes (non flowering plants). Figures are based on the average
species richness per 200m2 plot.
**The derelict land and built-up figures are not from the Countryside survey data (see Additional information).
***BRE Global have split the 'Built-up and gardens' Countryside survey category into these headings to reflect the
differing impact of building on these types of land.
****The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent; a linear scale has been used to determine intermediate values
between zero ecological value, where development occurs within 5 years from the end of occupation and maintenance
works, and the value at 30 years based on the full species richness for the relevant broad habitat. This presents a
minimum figure which can be amended on the advice of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist and their site survey.
302 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Land Use and Ecology
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Assessment of a Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger
single development development and the soft landscape and ecological features form a common part
on a larger site of the whole site, for the purpose of assessing this issue the plot types and areas
for the entire site must be used.
CN5 Infill developments Where a new building is an infill on an existing occupied site, then the construction
on existing occupied zone for the new building would be the area of site assessed for the purposes of
site this issue.
CN6 Site clearance prior Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological
to purchase of the features – Compliance notes
site
CN7 Green roofs/walls The contribution of plant species on a green roof can only be incorporated within
See criterion 1b. the calculation where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has been appointed to advise on
suitable plant species for the roof.
Presently green walls cannot be considered compliant within this BREEAM issue due
to concerns over high maintenance requirements which are often not self
supporting/sustainable, resulting in deterioration of these plants. If the assessor
feels that the green wall specified meets the aims of this issue and will be self
sustaining, details can be sent to BRE for consideration. Ground planted plants
trained up a framework supported by the building would be acceptable
(confirmed by the SQE) as these are not so dependent on systems and
maintenance.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 303
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Methodology
Calculating the change in ecological value for a site
The change in ecological value is determined by measuring the diversity (species richness and cover) of plants on the site
immediately before site clearance/preparation and after construction of the assessed development. The ecological value is
expressed as an area-weighted average of plant species richness for the site’s broad habitat types. This enables BREEAM to
use plant species as an indicator of the development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value.
A 2065m2 existing site consists of the following types of land and, using data from the table above, plant species richness:
The ecological value of the site in its existing condition is calculated as follows, for each plot type;
The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values:
Therefore, as the ecological value has decreased by no less than minus nine, for this example one credit can be awarded.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
304 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Land Use and Ecology
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone
Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.
Other information
See LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features ‘Other information’ for information that also apply to
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology.
Where green roofs are specified The GRO Green Roof Code1 provides guidance on green roof design, installation and
maintenance and maximising their environmental benefits.
Some of the Countryside Survey broad habitat data have not been used within this BREEAM issue either because the broad
habitat supports no taxon richness or because it is unlikely that buildings will be constructed within these habitat types e.g.
bog, fen etc.
BREEAM assumptions
In order to use the Countryside Survey data within BREEAM, BRE Global have made the following assumptions:
1The GRO Green Roof Code: Green Roof Code of Practice for the UK 2011, Groundwork Sheffield
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 305
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1. Built-up (maintained buildings and hard landscaping) have a plant species richness of zero.
2. The previously developed land category is relevant for derelict sites within a broad habitat type where plant species
found in that habitat are likely to reclaim the site if left to do so over a defined period of time. BRE have assumed this is
the case for land found within the grassland, heath, derelict, gardens, allotments and urban parkland habitats. It has not
been assumed for other categories as BRE Global are unable to confirm an appropriate period over which planting will
re-establish itself on derelict land within these other broad habitat types.
3. A period of 5 to 10, 10 to 20 and 20 to 30 year’s dereliction is used; the species richness figures against each period for
a particular habitat type are based on a re-establishment rate of 30% of richness, 75% and 100% respectively.
4. BRE have split the ‘Built up and gardens’ category from the Countryside Survey into ‘Gardens, allotments and urban
parkland’, ‘Derelict’ and ‘Built-up’ habitat types. This split is to reflect the differing impact of building on this type of land.
306 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Land Use and Ecology
Aim
To encourage actions taken to enhance the ecological value of the site as a result of development.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed by the client or their project representative by the end of the
Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to report on enhancing the ecology of the site, and:
a. The SQE provides an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for the enhancement of the site’s ecology.
b. The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE (see also CN4).
2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been, or will be, implemented in
the final design and build.
Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose
of enhancing the ecological value of the site.
OR
Criteria 1 to 5 are applicable as an alternative means of demonstrating compliance with this issue.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 307
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional
assessment criteria - guidance on how to apply the criteria.
Local expertise Note that guidance may be sought from bodies such as The Wildlife Trust, The Royal
See criterion 6. Horticultural Society, etc. to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological
measures that enhance the ecological value of the site.
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Timing of ecologist's The suitably qualified ecologist must be appointed to carry out site surveys of
survey and report existing site ecology, on which their report is based (or to provide verification where
See criterion 1. the report is prepared by others) at the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or
equivalent) in order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement.
CN5 Appropriate Appropriate recommendations for enhancing the ecological value of the site are to
recommendations include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation
See criterion 1. relating to protected species and habitats.
These recommendations may include ecological recommendations as detailed in
the definitions.
CN6 Guidance for Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New
ecologists and Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note
assessors to be provided on the BREEAM website.
CN7 Plant species Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional and/or UK Priority
See criterion 4. Species/Habitats, or those species specified by the SQE with a known attraction or
benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number
308 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Land Use and Ecology
CN8 Increase in BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of
ecological value the assessed site. The second credit is achieved on the basis that an increase in
See criterion 4. ecological value post development is achieved, compared to the value of the site
pre-development. Where the SQE identifies that an increase in the ecological value
of the site can be achieved without meeting the target of an increase of 6 plant
species the credit can be awarded if there is clear justification which addresses the
following three points:
The BREEAM Assessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQE when
determining compliance for this issue.
CN9 Infill construction on Where it is not possible to implement ecological enhancements within the
existing sites with construction zone due to overriding security issues, or where space for ecological
limited space for enhancements within the zone is severely limited, ecological enhancements made to
ecological other areas of the site can be taken into account and used to determine the number
enhancements or of BREEAM credits achieved. These enhancements must be made within the
overriding security boundary of the wider existing development and be planned and commissioned
requirements on a similar time scale to the assessed development. Examples of instances where
See criterion 1. this Compliance note may apply include new ‘infill’ building developments within
existing HM Prison sites, further and higher education campuses, retail or business
parks.
Methodology
For the methodology used to calculate the increase in plant species refer to the Methodology section in BREEAM issue LE 03
Minimising impact on existing site ecology – Methodology
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 309
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Ecological recommendations
Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site. Measures may
include but are not limited to:
1. The planting of locally appropriate native species or non-native species with a known attraction or benefit to local
wildlife.
2. The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides).
3. The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.
4. Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key times of the year
(e.g. breeding seasons).
5. The proper integration, design and maintenance of SUDs (such as rain gardens), green roofs, green walls,
community orchards, community allotments etc.
Other information
Flora Locale (www.floralocale.org) may be a useful site for finding suppliers of British flora.
Biological Records Centres and the National Biological Network collate data on species findings for the UK. Design teams,
assessors and ecologists can support the collation of species data by providing survey records from the assessed
development to the local Biological Records Centre (www.brc.ac.uk/irecord) or nationally to the National Biological Network.
310 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Land Use and Ecology
2 No
Aim
To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site and the surrounding area’s biodiversity.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
Up to two credits
1. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed prior to commencement of activities onsite and they confirm that
all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to the protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with during
the design and construction process.
2. Where a landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least the first five
years after project completion in accordance with BS 42020:2013 1 Section 11.1. This is to be handed over to the
building owner/occupants for use by the grounds maintenance staff.
3. Where, in addition to criteria 1 and 2, measures to improve the assessed sites long term biodiversity are adopted,
according to Table - 53. The BREEAM credits can then be awarded as follows:
1 2
2 4
Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) confirms that some of the additional measures listed in Table - 53 are not
applicable to the assessed development, the credits can be awarded as follows:
All 4 3 2 1
1 2 2 2 2 1
2 4 4 3 2 1
1BS 42020: 2013 Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning Development, BSI 2013
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 311
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity
1 The principal contractor nominates a Biodiversity Champion with the authority to influence site
activities and ensure that detrimental impacts onsite biodiversity are minimised in line with the
recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
2 The principal contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the
project. Specific training must be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are
aware of how to avoid damaging site ecology during operations onsite. Training should be
based on the findings and recommendations for protection of ecological features highlighted
within a report prepared by a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
3 The principal contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their
effectiveness throughout key stages of the construction process. The requirement commits the
principal contractor to make such records available where publicly requested.
4 Where a new ecologically valuable habitat appropriate to the local area is created. This includes a
habitat that supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is
nationally, regionally or locally important itself; including any UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP)
priority habitats1 Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) habitats, those protected within statutory
sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites identified in local plans. Local biodiversity
expertise should be sought during the Preparation and Brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to help
identify species of local biodiversity importance onsite and ensure that the proposals support
local priorities.
5 Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist onsite, the contractor programmes site works to
minimise disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and soft
landscape have been, or will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise
disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works may have a significant impact on, for example, breeding
birds, flowering plants, seed germination, amphibians etc. Actions such as phased clearance of
vegetation may help to mitigate ecological impacts. This additional requirement will be achieved
where a clear plan has been produced detailing how activities will be timed to avoid any impact
on site biodiversity in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
1For information on UK BAP Priority Habitats refer to Joint Nature Conservation Committee: www.jncc.defra.gov.uk,
312 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Land Use and Ecology
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Where additional In all cases it is necessary to employ a Suitably Qualified Ecologist to achieve these
measures are not credits. As a minimum the ecologist must provide the following in writing:
applicable 1. Confirmation that criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved
See criterion 1,2 and 2. Clarification on how many of the additional measures for criterion 3 are
3. applicable and have been achieved
3. Guidance on how to achieve additional measure 4 (where possible).
Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist confirms that none of the additional
measures are applicable (due to the nature of the site and its surroundings) full
credits can be awarded for demonstrating compliance with criteria 1 and 2.
Building specific
CN5 Education (pre- This could take the form of meetings several times a year with staff/pupils/students
school, school and working party to help them plan conservation and ecological enhancement work,
sixth form college or activities relating the ecology in or near the school or college grounds.
buildings only)
Additional measure
6: Ongoing support
and advice
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 313
Land use BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN6 Prisons The Prison Service Biodiversity Action (PSBAP)1 should be referred to for prison
Additional measure buildings where additional measure 4 is being assessed. For habitats that are not
4 listed in the PSBAP guidance on appropriate habitat creation should be sought
from the National Biodiversity Network and the UKBAP.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Biodiversity
Biodiversity is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal, plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the
habitats that they depend upon.
Biodiversity Champion
An individual formally tasked by the principal contractor with the responsibility for monitoring and influencing site
activities and minimising detrimental impact on biodiversity. The individual must have sufficient authority and time on
site and knowledge of ecology and construction to carry out the role. The Biodiversity Champion does not have to be
1Statement of Action and Strategy for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan, HMPS, 2003.
314 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Land Use and Ecology
an ecologist or ecological expert. This may be the same person as the Sustainability Champion inMan 03 Responsible
construction practices.
Other information
Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This
information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
BS 42020: 2013 Section 11.1 states that the following should be included in long-term management plans for habitats,
species and biodiversity features:
BS 42020: 2013 also states that the level of detail required for any given site should be that which is necessary to ensure the
effective management of the biodiversity features present.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 315
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Pollution
316 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Pollution
3 No
Aim
To reduce the level of greenhouse gas emissions arising from the leakage of refrigerants from building systems.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Pre-requisite
Impact of refrigerant (1 to 2 credits)
Leak detection (1 credit).
OR alternatively, where the building does require the use of refrigerants, the three credits can be awarded as follows:
Pre-requisite
2. All systems (with electric compressors) must comply with the requirements of BS EN 378:2008 1 (parts 2 and 3) and
where refrigeration systems containing ammonia are installed, the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia Refrigeration
Systems Code of Practice2.
OR
4. Where air-conditioning or refrigeration systems are installed the refrigerants used have a Global Warming Potential
(GWP) ≤ 10.
OR
1BS EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements, BSI, 2008
2Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 317
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
assessment criteria option.
Option 2 – Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
If the building is designed in such a way that it avoids the need for refrigerant
containing building services, and therefore no 'refrigerant using' building services or
systems will be specified for the fit out, then the available credits can be awarded by
default (this would apply to Option 2 only).
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 Refrigerant charge For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only where the refrigerant
of less than 6kg charge in each unit is less than 6kg, the credit for leak detection and containment
can be awarded by default. This is on the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant
leak due to system failure is minimised, as individual leaks from each system will be
small where leakage occurs, and therefore there is little life cycle benefit of requiring
leak detection equipment on each small system.
318 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Pollution
Note: solutions such as this may be less energy efficient and as such may impact on
the achievement of credits under Ene 01.
CN5 Specification of Where more than one air conditioning/refrigeration system is installed in the
multiple systems building, the assessor must source the relevant technical data for each system and
enter it in to the Pol 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the weighted
average DELC for the multiple installation and the BREEAM credits can be awarded
or withheld accordingly.
CN6 Leak detection See The refrigerant leak detection criteria are still applicable in instances where any type
criteria 6 and 7. of non-solid refrigerant is present, i.e. even if the refrigerant meets BREEAM’s DELC
CO2e benchmark(s). Exceptions to this are systems that use natural and
environmentally benign refrigerants, such as air and water (for example lithium
bromide/water absorption chillers) and installations of small multiple hermetic
systems, where compliance note 1 above applies. These types of
system/refrigerants will achieve the leak detection credit by default.
Methodology
The number of Pol 01 BREEAM credits achieved is determined by the assessor using the BREEAM Pol 01 calculator.
The Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions (DELC) per kW of cooling capacity are calculated using the following equation:
[Refigerant loss operational + refrigerant loss system retirement] × GWP
Cooling Capacity (kW)
Where:
Refrigerant loss operational: (Ref charge x Sys op-life x (L1 + L2 + S1 + S2)) /100
Where:
The following default values must be used, where system specific data is not available:
Annual purge release factor (% refrigerant charge):- 0.5 (if the system does not require an annual purge, zero should be used).
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 319
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Annual service release (% refrigerant charge): 0.25 (this applies where the system requires opening up to carry out the annual
service. For systems which do not require opening up, there will be no associated annual release of refrigerant, therefore a
default of zero should be used).
Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year): 1% (based on a failure rate of 1 in 100 systems).
The following information must be sourced from the design team’s mechanical and electrical engineer and/or system
manufacturer:
System type
Refrigerant charge (kg)
GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant(s)
Cooling/heating capacity (kW).
Unitary Split 15
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for Air Conditioning units and the British Refrigeration Association’s
(BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI (2006)1
Note: The following should be considered when determining whether the system specified is defined as
small/medium/large:
Integral cabinets 3%
Centralised 19%
320 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Pollution
Medium/large chillers 5%
Heat pumps 6%
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for Air Conditioning units and also Table 2 of the Market
Transformation Programmes Briefing Note for Commercial Refrigeration no. 36, ‘Direct Emission of Refrigerant Gases’
(version 1.2). The figures are based on the average of the leakage rates from the four separate studies reported in Table
2 (where a range is reported the higher value was used).
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
3 and 5 Completed copy of the Pol 01 calculator tool As per interim design stage
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Ozone
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 321
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available including infra-red,
semi-conductor or electro-chemical.
Refrigerant recovery
The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container.
Refrigerant
There are three main make-ups of refrigerants:
1. Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon. Because they do
not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be one of the least damaging to the
earth's ozone layer.
2. Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine, and carbon.
These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the environment as some
other refrigerants.
3. Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry high
amounts of chlorine so they are known for being the most hazardous to the ozone layer.
The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocol. Phase out
programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new build
and most existing situations. The industry’s favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are often potent global
warming contributors. Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are therefore
preferred long term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all buildings,
provided health and safety issues are fully addressed.
The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) hosts a HCFC Help Centre which contains information about the
1www.etl.decc.gov.uk
322 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Pollution
management and phase out of HCFCs and alternatives to HCFCs in the refrigeration and air conditioning sector
http://www.uneptie.org/ozonaction/topics/hcfc.asp.
Other information
Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP
R-30 Dichloromethane 9
R-170 Ethane 3
R-290 Propane 3
R-600 Butane 3
R-600a Isobutane 3
R-717 Ammonia 0
R1150 Ethylene 3
R-1234yf 2,3,3,3-Tetrafluoropropene 4
R-1270 Propylene 3
Sources: The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) ‘2006 Report of the Refrigeration, Air conditioning and
Heat Pumps Technical Options Committee’ (page 32-34): http://ozone.unep.org/teap/Reports/RTOC/index.shtml
Appendix A of the Department of Trade and Industry guidance ‘Refrigerant and Air Conditioning CFC and HCFC Phase
Out: Advice on Alternatives and Guidelines for Users’.http://www.berr.gov.uk/files/file29101.pdf
BS EN 378-1:2008+A2:2012: Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. Part 1:
Basic requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria - Annex E.
The formula used to calculate the Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions in BREEAM is based on the Total Equivalent Warming
Impact (TEWI) calculation method for new stationary refrigeration and air conditioning systems. TEWI is a measure of the
global warming impact of equipment that takes into account both direct emissions (as assessed in this BREEAM issue) and
indirect emissions produced through the energy consumed in operating the equipment (which is assessed in the BREEAM
energy section).
Refer to BS EN 378-1 1 and the British Refrigeration Association’s (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI for further
details. The BRA publication also includes sectoral release factors for new systems designed to best practice standards.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 323
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
REAL Zero
The refrigeration and air conditioning sector supported by the Carbon Trust is working across all sectors of business and
industry, to help achieve significant reductions in carbon emissions due to refrigerant leakage from installed systems. The
Institute of Refrigeration led initiative, Real Zero, is building a clearer understanding of where and why leakage occurs as well as
how to prevent it.
For further information including guidance notes, calculators/tools and case study information
visit:http://www.ior.org.uk/real-zero
1BS EN 378-1 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements Part 1: Basic requirements,
definitions, classification and selection criteria. BSI, 2008
324 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 02 NOx emissions Pollution
Pol 02 NO emissions
x
Number of credits available Minimum standards
Aim
To contribute to a reduction in national NO emission levels through the use of low emission heat sources in the building.
x
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
≤ 70 mg/kWh 2 credits
≤ 40 mg/kWh 3 credits
2. Report via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool the direct and indirect NO emissions in mg/kWh and energy
x
consumption in kWh/m2/yr arising from systems installed to meet the building's space heating, cooling and hot water
demands.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 325
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option.
assessment Option 2 – Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
criteria apply.
Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on
assessment how to apply the criteria.
criteria
Country specific
CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the
guidance building type and function apply.
General
CN4 New build If the heating/hot water demand for the new extension is being met by an existing
extensions to system, then the NO emission level for the existing system must be assessed against
x
existing buildings the criteria of this issue.
CN5 Highly insulated Where the heating load for a highly insulated building is less than or equal to 7% of the
building heat load for a Building Regulations compliant building of the same size and type, one
credit can be awarded regardless of the NO emission level. Figures used for
x
calculations of the percentage of total heat demand must be based on the output from
approved building energy calculation software.
CN6 NO data Where NO data is provided in different units or at a level of excess oxygen greater than
x x
provided in zero, the manufacturer/supplier will need to be asked to convert this to comply with the
different units BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may adjust the figure using the relevant
correction factors provided in the Methodology section. Note that the conversion
factors provided do not apply where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are
being assessed. Where CHP systems are used, the information must be obtained from
the system manufacturer.
CN7 Grid electricity Where grid electricity is used to supply a heating system, the NO should be assumed to
x
be 617 mg/kWh for the purpose of BREEAM. This is to reflect the likely NO emissions
x
fromgrid electricity over the next 10 years based on the predicted generation mix in the
UK.
326 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 02 NOx emissions Pollution
CN8 Heat recovery Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NO emissions for the purpose of this
x
issue.
CN9 Open flues No credits may be awarded for open flue heating or hot water systems.
CN10 Water heating Where the water heating can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the buildings
benchmark and total energy consumption, these credits can be awarded based solely on the NO
x
point of use emissions from space heating.
heaters
CN11 Assessment and At present the Pol 02 issue does not benchmark and award credits for NO emission
x
reporting of a levels associated with a building's cooling demands. To facilitate possible future
building'sNO benchmarking of this kind and alignment with European Standards on the Sustainability
x
emissions from of Construction Works, BREEAM does require, as a condition of achieving any credits for
cooling this issue, the reporting of both direct and indirect NO emissions resulting from
x
meeting the buildings heating, cooling and hot water demands.
In the case of indirect emissions, this refers primarily to emissions associated with grid
electricity, where grid electricity is a/the source of energy for the building's heating,
cooling and/or hot water demands. Direct NO emissions are those resulting from the
x
burning of fuel on site or in the assessed building to meet heating, cooling and/or hot
water demands, for example via a gas/oil fired/biomass boiler.
CN12 Industrial First credit: Where the assessed building is designed without an office area, the first
Office/operational credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the
areas not present operational area benchmark is met.
Second credit: Where the operational area of the assessed building is designed to be
untreated, the second credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where
compliance with the office area benchmark is met.
Where there is no office area and no heating in the operational area, this issue is not
assessed.
Methodology
Conversion factors
Manufacturers should be asked to supply NO emissions data in mg/kWh, measured on a dry basis. Where this is not possible
x
the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in ppm, mg/MJ, mg/m3 or wet.
It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and are likely to give conservative answers.
This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits achieved. Note that these conversion factors are not applicable
where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being used. Please see the calculation procedures below for further
details on assessing CHP systems for this issue.
1. Figures in mg/m3 should be multiplied by 0.859 in order to gain emissions in mg/kWh1 A conversion may also be
necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below)
2. Figures in parts per million (ppm) should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to obtain mg/kWh. A conversion may also be
necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below)
1BS EN 15502-1:2012 Gas-fired heating boilers Part 1: General requirements and tests.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 327
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
3. Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to show emissions in mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6 MJ). A conversion may
also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).
3% x 1.17
6% x 1.40
15% x 3.54
Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air.
Calculating NO emission levels from combined heat and power (CHP) systems
x
Where CHP systems are specified, it is only necessary to consider the heat related NO emissions for the assessment of this
x
issue.
NO emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the respective power outputs. A NO emission rate equivalent to
x x
the current rate for grid electricity should be assumed for the electrical output (i.e. 617 mg/kWh supplied), and the remaining
NO should be allocated to the heat output. Only the heat-related component is then compared with the benchmark scale.
x
The following formula should be used to determine this:
X = (A - B)/C
Where:
Term Description
A NO emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWhelec), i.e. the NO emitted by the CHP
x x
1BS EN 14792:2005 Stationary Source emissions - Determination of mass concentration of nitrogen oxides (NO ) - Reference
x
method: Chemiluminescence.
328 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 02 NOx emissions Pollution
Term Description
system per unit of electricity generated. It is essential that this figure is obtained from the
installer/supplier of the system and should be based on the system when operating at full load.
B NO emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWhelec) this should be
x
assumed to be 617 mg/kWh.
The above methodology determines the net NO emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared with central
x
generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where x is calculated to be negative, it should be
assumed to be zero.
This is likely to be the case where a CHP system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and
therefore a secondary heating system is required.
( ( ) )
AverageNOX = N 1 × H 1/ HT + N 2 × (H 2 / HT ) … + Nn × (Hn / HT ) ( )
Where:
Term Description
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 329
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Where:
Term Description
MElec NO emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be 617 mg/kWhElec
x
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
NO emissions
x
NO emissions are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NO reacts with heat and sunlight to
x x
produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain which has a
detrimental effect on ecosystems. For the purposes of BREEAM, NOx emission levels are required in units of mg/kWh,
measured on a dry basis at 0% excess oxygen levels.
Other information
Some systems may find it difficult to achieve credits in this issue, including:
Heat pumps
Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission rates higher than those required by BREEAM
and are therefore typically unable to achieve credits under this issue. However, there is a formula for determining NO
x
emissions from heat pumps in the Methodology section. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat pumps
is recognised in the energy section of BREEAM.
330 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 02 NOx emissions Pollution
District heating
District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NO emission rates higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM
x
credits.
Biomass
Biomass systems are recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion, by employing a renewable fuel source
(provided it is sustainably sourced). However, biomass can produce a significant amount of NO and so may not achieve this
x
credit. They may, however, gain recognition in the energy section of BREEAM.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 331
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
5 No
Aim
To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to public sewers and watercourses, thereby minimising the risk and impact
of localised flooding on and off site, watercourse pollution and other environmental damage.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts;
b. The final design of the building and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate consultant
in accordance with the hierarchy approach outlined in section 5 of BS 8533:2011 1.
Pre-requisite
4. An appropriate consultant is appointed to carry out, demonstrate and/or confirm the development's compliance with
the following criteria:
1BS 8533:2011 Assessing and managing flood risk in development - Code of Practice, 2011
332 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
One credit
5. Where drainage measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the watercourses
(natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. This should comply
at the 1 year and 100 year return period events.
6. Calculations include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice
planning guidance (see definitions).
One credit
7. Where flooding of property will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused either by extreme rainfall
or a lack of maintenance); AND
EITHER
8. The post development run-off volume, over the development lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the
assessed site’s development for the 100 year 6 hour event, including an allowance for climate change (see criterion 13).
9. Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration or other
SuDS techniques.
10. Justification from the Appropriate Consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltration
or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options.
11. The post development peak rate of run-off is reduced to the limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is defined as the
highest flow rate from the following options:
a. The pre development 1-year peak flow rate; OR
b. The mean annual flow rate Qbar; OR
c. 2L/s/ha.
Note that for the 1-year peak flow rate the 1 year return period event criterion applies (as described in the peak run-off
criteria above).
12. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in
place.
13. For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance
with current best practice planning guidance.
1Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 13 Vehicle washing and cleaning, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage
Service, 2007
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 333
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
a. There is a decrease in the impermeable area by 50% or more, from the pre-existing impermeable hard surfaces; OR
b. Where all run-off from the roof for rainfall depths up to 5 mm from all new and existing parts of the building have
been managed on site using source control methods
OR
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
criteria assessment options.
Simple buildings
334 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
3. Criterion 22
OR
One credit
4. Criterion 23
Minimising water course pollution (1 credit available)
One credit
5. Criteria 15 to 21
6. Criterion 14
Exemplary level credit
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this
BREEAM issue:
7. Criteria 4 to 13
Country specific
CN3 External storage The following lists the standards/building regulations relevant for the assessment of
and delivery areas this issue in a specific UK country:
guidance
Scotland and Northern Ireland
documents
For assessment in Scotland and Northern Ireland, the 'Pollution Prevention Pays
See
Guidelines' from the Environment Agency reference the following documents which are
Criterion 21.
relevant:
General
CN4 Alternative None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded
standards and against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding
recommendations implications are too great (this includes a recommendation given by the statutory body
from an even where such a recommendation cannot or is not statutorily enforced).
appropriate Where the local authority (or other statutory body) has set more rigorous criteria than
statutory body those above these must be met in order to achieve the relevant credit(s).
See criteria 1 and
2.
CN5 Contaminated Drainage designs for sites must take into account legislation relating to contaminated
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 335
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
sites sites, however in many circumstances even on contaminated sites there may be
See criteria 8 and opportunities for the installation of some SuDS techniques. Please see the Other
9. information section for more details.
Flood risk
CN6 Sources of The FRA must detail the risk of flooding from the following sources:
flooding 1. Fluvial (rivers).
See criteria 1 and 2. Tidal.
2. 3. Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural).
4. Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock
(aquifers).
5. Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers.
6. Reservoirs, canals and other artificial sources.
Please see Other informationsection which provides more detail on the above sources
of flooding.
The content of the FRA should be based on historic trends, but should also account for
predicted changes to the climate which may impact on the flood risk to the site in future.
CN7 Functional flood The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual probability’
plain cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional flood plain. Technical
See criterion 3. Guidance to the National Planning Policy Framework 4 defines the functional flood plain
as a ‘zone [that] comprises land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood’.
If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’,
confirmation should be provided from the local planning authority that they are
satisfied with the proposals.
336 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
CN9 600 mm It is accepted that, for buildings located in medium and high risk flood zones, areas of
threshold See the car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600
criterion 3a. mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to the site,
and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600 mm above the
design flood level) to ensure the building and site do not become an ‘island’ in the event
of a flood.
Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the
topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600 mm
threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical
solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access to
it, meets the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or as
required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the
threshold.
For buildings located in medium or high flood risk zones, any areas used to store
sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and perishable materials, e.g. radioactive
materials, microbiological facilities, server rooms, libraries, etc., must be located above
the 600 mm threshold.
CN10 Level of detail For smaller sites, e.g. less than 1 ha (10,000 m2), the level of detail required in an
required in the FRA acceptable FRA will depend on the size of the site and the arrangement of buildings on
for smaller sites that site. For a small site with a relatively simple arrangement of buildings this might
See criteria 1 and consist of a brief report. For larger sites with a higher density of buildings a more
2. detailed assessment would be appropriate.
For small simple sites (2000 m2 and less), an acceptable FRA could be a brief report
carried out by the contractor’s engineer confirming the risk of flooding from all sources
of flooding, including information obtained from the Environment Agency, water
company/sewerage undertaker, other relevant statutory authorities, site investigation
and local knowledge.
CN11 Sites with many Where the assessed building is part of a larger development of buildings, there are a
buildings number of options for assessment of the surface water run-off credits:
1. The individual building and its associated hard standing areas can be assessed
independently where the run-off is being dealt with on a building-by-building
basis (i.e. each building has its own dedicated sub-catchment that serves only that
building).
2. When assessing the run-off from a number of buildings (including domestic and
non-domestic buildings) the assessment must take into account the drainage
from the local sub-catchment serving all those dwellings/buildings. Note that
proportioning cannot be used to calculate the percentage of run-off discharging
into the local sub-catchment resulting from just the assessed building.
3. The whole development can be assessed for compliance.
Whichever approach is taken to demonstrate compliance, it must be consistent when
completing both the rate of run-off and volume of run-off calculations.
CN12 Discharge to the The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by
sea or tidal default if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary or the sea.
estuaries The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteria
are to be awarded by default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes would only
carry run-off from the site and that they would not need to cross privately owned land
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 337
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea. Please see Relevant
definitions section for a definition of tidal estuary.
CN13 No change in Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or
impermeable area municipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post-development, the peak and
volume rate of run-off requirements for the surface water run-off credits will be met by
default.
Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly showing
the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be provided for
the pre- and post-development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on the
drawings) to show a comparison between the areas of drained impermeable surfaces
pre- and post-development.
In this instance a flood risk assessment must be carried out and any opportunities
identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.
CN14 Limiting discharge For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would
flow rate require a flow rate of less than 5 l/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5 l/s may
See criterion 11. be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.
CN15 Highways and Where new non-adoptable highways are built, including those for developments with a
impermeable mixture of buildings, all of the new impermeable surfaces must be included in
areas calculations to demonstrate compliance with the peak rate of run-off and volume of
run-off criteria. Where buildings are built beside existing highways or where adoptable
highways are built, the impermeable area of the highway does not need to be included
in the calculations.
CN16 Derelict sites. If the site has been derelict for over five years, the Appropriate Consultant must assess
See criteria 7, the previous drainage network and make reasonable assumptions to establish
10,11 and 13. probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice simulation
modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at the relevant
discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will be
required unless accurate data already exists from a previous survey. The resultant
professional report can then be used to determine the pre-development volumes and
rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site must be deemed greenfield
pre-development, assuming Soil type 5 for the calculation of the pre development site
run-off.
CN17 Rainwater BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A5 must be followed
harvesting where rainwater harvesting systems are specified for storm water control. To ensure
flood risk is not increased if the rainwater harvesting system is, for some reason,
unavailable, the exceedance flow route capacity provided in accordance with CIRIA
report C635 should ignore the beneficial effect of the rainwater harvesting system.
Watercourse pollution
CN18 5 mm discharge In a small number of sites it may not be possible for the first 5 mm of rainfall to be
for minimising prevented from leaving site completely. Where this is the case, an appropriately
watercourse qualified professional must design the system to ensure that the intent of this criterion
pollution has been met as far as possible and provide justifications to explain why the criterion
See criterion 14. could not be fully achieved on the site. Where this can be justified, the awarding of the
338 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
water quality credit would not be affected, provided all other relevant criteria have been
achieved.
CN19 5 mm End-of-pipe solutions, such as ponds and basins, will only be deemed to comply with
requirement - the 5 mm criteria where the principal run-off control to prevent discharge from the first
end-of-pipe 5 mm of a rainfall event, is achieved using source control and site control methods.
solutions
See criterion 14.
CN20 5 mm Green roofs can be deemed to comply with this requirement for the rain that falls onto
requirement - their surface. However evidence is still required to demonstrate that the 5 mm rainfall
green roofs from all other hard surfaces on site is being dealt with, to allow this credit to be
See criterion 14. awarded.
CN21 Areas that are a For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, an area that presents a
source of pollution risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste
See criteria 16, 17 disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.
and 18.
CN22 Extension or infill Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill
building on development, the watercourse pollution criteria apply to areas within the construction
existing site zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction
zone that are affected by the new works, i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed
development.
CN23 Suitable level of In all cases the Appropriate Consultant should use their professional judgement to
treatment determine the most appropriate strategy for minimising watercourse pollution.
See criteria 15 to
21.
CN24 Roof plant Roof top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from polluting
See criteria 17,18 substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under the pollution
and 20. aspect of this issue, as the main risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse.
Methodology
Calculating peak rate of run-off
Key publications that should be referred to for guidance on calculating the peak rate of run-off include:
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 339
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Brownfield sites
The calculation of brownfield run-off rates should be as follows:
If the existing drainage is known then it should be modelled using best practice simulation modelling, to determine
the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at discharge points (without allowing surcharge of the system above cover
levels to drive greater flow rates through the discharge points).
If the system is not known, then the brownfield run-off should be calculated using the greenfield run-off models
described above but with a Soil Type 5.
For example, if the flow rate for the 1 year and 100 year events were 4 l/s and 7 l/s respectively, then the limiting discharges
would be 5 l/s and 7 l/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2 l/s and 4 l/s, then a maximum of 5 l/s limiting discharge rate could
be applied to both discharge points.
Sites should not be subdivided to enable higher overall limiting discharge rates to be claimed. It is, however, recognised that
some sites may require more than one discharge point as a result of the local topography or existing surrounding drainage
infrastructure, and in such cases, the limiting discharge flow rate may be increased to a level no more than 5 l/s at each
discharge point. The assessor should seek evidence that the number of discharge points is necessary due to topography
and/or infrastructure limitations. Evidence may be in the form of a topographical map and an explanation from the
Appropriate Consultant as to why multiple discharge points are required, stating that it is not feasible to have fewer
discharge points.
340 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Additional information
Please note this section will be revised when the National Standards for Sustainable Drainage and associated regulations
come into force.
Relevant definitions
Adoptable highways
For the purposes of BREEAM, an ‘adoptable’ highway is a highway that is the responsibility of the highways authority
in terms of installation and maintenance of surface water drainage which only carries run-off from the highway itself.
This means that to fall under the definition of an ‘adoptable highway’ the drainage network must not be directly
connected to any other upstream drainage network (e.g. from a private development) and only handle run-off from
the adoptable highway. Where drainage within the highway will carry run-off from both the highway and housing, it is
not regarded as an 'adoptable' highway. In this instance the drainage design must take account of the highway run-
off.
Appropriate consultant
A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SUDS and flood prevention measures and
completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are
required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
Catchment
The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into sub-
catchments.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 341
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Control devices
Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices are
check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir/orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditional control
devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable of regular
inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not result from
blockage or other malfunction. For guidance on control devices, refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007) and
other best practice guidelines.
Discharge point
The discharge point(s) is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a
watercourse.
Flood defences
Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood
defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore
preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still
preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk
of flooding purely for the sake of new development.
Flood event
A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph.
Flood probability
The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period.
For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.
Flood risk
The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.
Flood storage
The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood
event.
342 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
Flood zones
Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the UK:
PPS25 (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15 (Northern Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise
flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in
Northern Ireland will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to
determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for
England (Table - 58 ). The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or
recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk
Whilst the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK, there
are some differences. The definitions are outlined in Table - 58.
Greenfield
A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more.
Hard surfaces
These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and external hard landscaping.
Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded.
Infiltration
The passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on.
Limiting discharge
The limiting discharge is based upon the calculated pre-development flow rate at a discharge point.
Pre-development
The state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client/developer (or, where
the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current state).
Qbar
An estimation of the mean annual flood flow rate from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood estimations for small
catchments).
Rainwater discharge
Rainwater discharge is the rainwater which flows from the development site to watercourses and sewers. It is also
referred to as run-off.
Run-off
This is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 343
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Sewerage undertaker
This is a Body, typically a water company, with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and also
surface water from roofs and yards of premises.
Soakaways
A sub-surface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water into the ground. As a general point,
soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point
source soakaways should be avoided for road and car park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in
an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators.
SuDS techniques
One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for
example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving,
soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes, green roofs
and underground attenuation storage. For more information refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).
Tidal estuary
A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea and
within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should be
unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flow
of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other sites
which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall water levels in the estuary.
Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidal movements) cannot
be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.
Treatment
Improving the quality of water by physical, chemical and/or biological means.
344 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
Volume of run-off
The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres.
Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and post-
development.
Other information
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 345
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
probability of flooding no
greater than that
specified for England.
High annual probability of Zone 3a High Probability Zone C1 and C2 Medium to high risk areas
flooding 1 in 100 or greater chance * For the purposes of Annual probability of
of river flooding (>1%) and BREEAM assume the same watercourse, tidal or
a 1 in 200 or greater lower and upper coastal flooding: greater
chance of flooding from probability of flooding as than 0.5% (1:200).
the sea (>0.5%). that specified for England.
Zone 3b The Functional
Floodplain
Land where water has to
flow or be stored in times
of flood.
Please note: Northern Ireland PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood
maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or
other relevant data/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same
definitions as those outlined for England. The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer
further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk
Holding ponds.
Swales.
Reed beds.
Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved
surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less
permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in
some areas.
Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local
geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function.
Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system.
Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.
Green roofs.
346 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
For more information refer to The SuDS Manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).
PPG3 is produced on behalf of the Environment and Heritage Service (Northern Ireland), Scottish Environment Protection
Agency and Environment Agency (England and Wales).
In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be
required if appropriately designed sustainable urban drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance.
Contaminated sites
Examples of contamination legislation that should be considered includes: the Water Resources Act 1991, the Environmental
Protection Act 1990, the Groundwater Directive (2006/118/EC) and, more recently the Groundwater (England and Wales)
Regulations 2009. Where the site risk assessment confirms that infiltration SuDS techniques are not appropriate, SuDS
techniques that do not allow infiltration, such as swales lined with an impermeable membrane, can be used. It may be the case
that only some areas of the site are contaminated and therefore infiltration SuDS techniques can be used elsewhere on the
site. There may also be a requirement to remediate the contaminated soils, creating opportunities for the use of infiltration
SuDS post-remediation.
1Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems, Environment
Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage Service, 2006.
2C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
3Pollution Prevention Pays, Environment Agency, 2013.
4Technical Guidance to the National Planning Policy Framework, DCLG, March 2012.
5BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A
6C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
7Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments, W5-074/A/TR/1 Revision D, EA/DEFRA (September 2005) Useful
Link:
http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130123162956/http:/www.defra.gov.uk/environment/flooding/documents/
research/sc030219.pdf
8IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994)
9Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999)
10CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedence in urban drainage – good practice
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 347
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1 No
Aim
To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised, reducing
unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
One credit
1. Where external lighting pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for external
lighting without adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 2 (and its accompanying notes) of the ILP
Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2011 1. Buildings located in Scotland must comply with the light
pollution criteria in the guidance note ‘Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption2’. This can
be demonstrated via completion of the checklists in Annexes B and C of the guidance note by a relevant member of the
design team.
3. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 23:00 and 07:00.
4. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 23:00 and 07:00, this part of the lighting system
complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 2 of the ILP’s Guidance notes.
5. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 – The
Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements3
Compliance notes
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
348 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Pollution
assessment Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment
criteria options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how
assessment to apply the criteria.
criteria
Country specific
CN3 Country No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building
specific type and function apply.
guidance
General
Methodology
The following provides guidance on when and how to apply the criteria to the external lighting associated with a building
being assessed:
1. Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only those areas affected by the works, i.e.
within the construction zone, need to be assessed. Where the assessment is of a building that forms part of an entire
new development, the criteria apply site-wide.
2. If the scope of the assessment covers a new extension only, then it is only new lighting specified as part of the extended
works that need to be assessed.
3. Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment.
4. Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM criteria
they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain evidence
confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 349
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM
assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Other information
The ILP Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2011 are available free of charge from the ILP website
www.theilp.org.uk.
Table 2 of the ILP guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations:
1. Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow.
2. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue.
3. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries.
4. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.
In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city centre). A
calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so that light in
potentially obtrusive directions is blocked.
1GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Professionals(ILP), 2011. www.theilp.org.uk,
2Guidance Note Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption, Scottish Executive, 2007.
3Technical Report No. 5: The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Third Ed, 2001.
350 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution Pollution
1 No
Aim
To reduce the likelihood of noise arising from fixed installations on the new development affecting nearby noise-sensitive
buildings.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
One credit
1. Where there are, or will be, no noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800 m radius of the assessed development.
OR alternatively, where the building does have noise sensitive areas or buildings within 800 m radius of the
development, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. Where a noise impact assessment in compliance with BS 7445 1 has been carried out and the following noise levels
measured/determined:
a. Existing background noise levels at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive development to the proposed
development or at a location where background conditions can be argued to be similar.
b. The rating noise level resulting from the new noise-source (see CN5).
3. The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant holding a recognised
acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body (see Relevant definitions in the Additional
information section).
4. The noise level from the proposed site/building, as measured in the locality of the nearest or most exposed noise-
sensitive development, is a difference no greater than +5dB during the day (07:00 to 23:00) and +3dB at night (23:00
to 07:00) compared to the background noise level.
5. Where the noise source(s) from the proposed site/building is greater than the levels described in criterion 4, measures
have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will comply with criterion 4.
Compliance notes
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 351
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
CN1 Applicable Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option.
assessment Option 2 – Shell and Core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
criteria Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment
options.
Simple buildings
Country specific
CN3 Country No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building
specific type and function apply.
guidance
General
CN4 Attenuating BS 8233:1999 2 gives recommendations for the control of noise in and around buildings.
noise at its Confirming the specification of attenuation measures in accordance with this Code of
source Practice can be used as a method of demonstrating compliance with criterion 4.
See criteria 4
and 5.
CN5 Compliance At the design stage of assessment, where noise sensitive areas or buildings are present,
at the design actual measurement is unlikely to be possible due to the planned but non-existent installation.
stage In such situations compliance can be demonstrated through the use of acousticians’
See criterion calculations or by scale model investigations. For such cases BS 7445-2 states that 'as
2. universally agreed prediction models do not exist, the method adopted should be carefully
described in the acoustician’s report” and that 'when available, prediction models accepted
by relevant authorities should be used'.
Where prediction through these methods is not possible, measurement will be necessary
using either a noise source similar to that proposed or, alternatively, measurement of the
actual noise from the installation (once installed); compliance with the latter approach
requires a written commitment to appoint a suitable qualified acoustician to carry out the
required measurements post-installation, and a further commitment to attenuate the noise
source in compliance with criteria 4 and 5 of BREEAM (if proved necessary by the
measurements).
CN6 Untreated This assessment issue does not apply to buildings designed to be untreated, i.e. where
buildings internal spaces will not be serviced by heating, ventilation or air conditioning systems and
therefore have no noise generating plant. Examples of such building types could include
industrial warehouse storage.
Methodology
None
352 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution Pollution
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1, 2 Map of local area highlighting noise sensitive As per interim design stage
buildings.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Other information
None
1BS 7445:1 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 1: Guide to quantities and procedures, British
Standards Institute, 2003.
BS 7445:2 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 2: Guide to the acquisition of data pertinent to land
use, British Standards Institute, 1991.
BS 7445:3 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 3: Guide to application to noise limits, British Standards
Institute, 1991.
2BS 8233 Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings, Code of practice, British Standards Institute, 1999.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 353
Innovation BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Innovation
354 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Inn 01 Innovation Innovation
Inn 01 Innovation
Number of credits available Minimum standards
10 No
Aim
To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not
rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance;
Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this Scheme Document for the exemplary level performance
assessment criteria.
Approved innovations
2. One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the building
complies with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation Application Form.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 355
Innovation BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Compliance notes
General
CN1 Exemplary level of Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that
performance contain exemplary performance levels.
Methodology
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues
For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the 'Methodology' section of the relevant BREEAM
issues.
Approved innovations
Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a Licensed BREEAM Assessor using the formal Approved
Innovation Application Form.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
1 As defined within existing BREEAM issues. As defined within existing BREEAM issues.
356 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Inn 01 Innovation Innovation
Additional information
Relevant definitions
Approved innovation
Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method or process that can be
shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider industry in
a manner that is not covered elsewhere in BREEAM. In addition the innovation has been approved by BRE Global in
accordance with its published BREEAM Innovation credit procedures.
Other information
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 357
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Appendices
358 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types Appendices
1. Teaching/specialist hospitals
2. General acute hospitals
3. Community and mental health hospitals
4. GP surgeries
5. Health centres and clinics
The table below provides a description of the typical facilities and services offered by and forming a part of one of the above
healthcare buildings. Where a healthcare development does not fit one of the building type descriptions below, BREEAM New
Construction can still be used to assess that building type provided it falls within the building type category descriptions
outlined in the scope section of this document. Where it does not fall in to one of these categories, the project will require the
development of bespoke assessment criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 359
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
360 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings Appendices
1. Pre-school, including;
a. Nursery schools1
b. Children’s centres2
2. Schools, including;
a. Primary schools
b. Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges)
c. All age-range schools (including education or teaching buildings at boarding schools)
d. Academies
e. Non-acute special educational needs (SEN) schools
3. Sixth form colleges
4. Further and higher education or vocational colleges and Institutions, including;
a. Teaching facility
b. Learning Resource Centre
c. Laboratory/workshop/studio
d. Student union
e. Or a mixture of the above types.
This BREEAM scheme has not been specifically tailored to assess acute SEN schools. However assessment using the
methodology is still possible, except where highly specialised accommodation is provided. Acute SEN schools are therefore
defined as an 'Other' building type and BREEAM assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs will
need to consider carefully all the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for such
building users, e.g. View out, Cyclist facilities, etc. Where it is not explicit within this scheme document for this building type, the
assessor will need to decide which, if any, building type assessment criteria is appropriate and apply accordingly, seeking
confirmation from BRE Global Ltd. on the application of alternative building criteria where appropriate to do so.
For more information on SEN please refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for disabled children with special educational
needs, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families (available from www.education.gov.uk)
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 361
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1Nursery school/education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not attained compulsory
school age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities/buildings for the teaching of children who are between
the ages of two or three to five years old.
2Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early education, full day
childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors and health screening.
Children’s centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school site.
362 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings Appendices
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess the following types of multi-residential buildings:
Where both a Code for Sustainable Homes and a BREEAM assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort, evidence
collected for the purpose of a CSH assessment can be used towards demonstrating compliance with the equivalent BREEAM
assessment criteria and vice versa.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 363
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
The BREEAM New Construction version can be applied to both fully fitted and shell and core building projects. This section
provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to shell and core projects.
A shell and core building project is defined as one where the developer’s scope of works is the design and construction of the
base building only, leaving a range of construction and fit out works to be completed before the building is able to be
occupied. This may include some or all of the following elements: the structure, building envelope, core building systems
including building servicing strategy and installations (such as HVAC) or plant support for installation of such systems and
where present, fit-out of common areas. Upon completion, the whole building or space within the building is sold or let to be
fitted out as appropriate for occupation. The new owner(s) or tenant(s) will fit-out the building’s accommodation in
accordance with their corporate and operational needs.
In these projects, where areas of the development are not fully-fitted, performance of the building and compliance with
BREEAM is verified based on the developer’s scope of works.only.This performance is measured using two standard project
type options that in turn define appropriate assessment criteria applicable to that project type. Whilst some projects will differ
to some extent from the scope of these standard options, for the purpose of BREEAM, issues not included within the chosen
option will be excluded from the assessment, even where they are within the Developer’s scope of works. This approach is
necessary to ensure clarity, consistency and comparability within the property market. A fully flexible filtering of issues based
on each individual projects scope would not allow comparability between BREEAM ratings, either in terms of performance
benchmarking or promotional/publicity purposes.
These shell and core assessment options are available only for the following non-domestic building types:
364 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments Appendices
Office
Retail
Industrial
Table 77-1summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues and their applicability to shell and core
projects.
When launched, certified assessments of shell and core projects that opted for either option 1 or option 2 under BREEAM UK
New Construction 2014 can choose to assess fit–out related issues under BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme to
gain a fully fitted-out status under BREEAM.
By having a two part assessment for the shell and core projects, where the shell and core parts and fit–out parts are assessed
separately, BREEAM aims to provide a flexible yet robust way of assessing shell and core projects.
Table 77-1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues: Shell and core applicability
Managment
Man 05 Aftercare N N
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 365
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Healthand wellbeingW
Energy
Transport
366 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments Appendices
Water
Materials
Mat 04 Insulation Y Y
Waste
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 367
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
LE 01 Site selection Y Y
Pollution
Innovation Y Y
368 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments Appendices
A simple building is defined as one where the building services are predominantly of limited capacity and local in their delivery,
largely independent from other systems in the building fabric and avoid complex control systems.
Where the building includes complex services, systems or functions/facilities including, but not limited to those listed below, it
cannot be defined or assessed as a ‘simple building’ and a full BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment should be
carried out:
The list above is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the types of services and systems that describe a more complex
building solution and therefore would not be present within a simple building. Examples of buildings which could fall under the
BREEAM UK New Construction definition of ‘simple building’ (depending on the remit of the works) include; offices,
educational and community buildings, GP surgeries, basic industrial units, and extensions to existing buildings.
The following section describes some of the additional features a ‘simple building’ may have. These descriptions can be used
to support the classification of a building for the purpose of a BREEAM ‘simple building’ assessment:
Building type
The building can be classified within any of the building types categories listed in the scope section of this Technical Manual,
including mixed-use developments/building types.
Building services
1. Space and/or hot water heating is provided by simple systems only, e.g. systems with total capacity of less than 100kW2
or point of use heaters.
2. Predominately naturally ventilated, using simple cross-flow ventilation relying solely on openable windows and/or trickle
vents, except in areas where mechanical extract ventilation is required by the Building Regulations.
Note: Buildings with small local systems, such as local split cooling systems or ventilation systems (to service single
rooms or areas for occasional or seasonal use), with a total system capacity of less than 12kW and a total collective
refrigerant charge of less than 5kg can be assessed using the ‘simple buildings’ criteria.
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 369
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
3. Domestic scale sanitary, kitchen and laundry facilities with only basic connections for hot and cold water provision and
drainage.
4. Building services commissioning required will be limited in complexity.
If a particular building does not meet the profile described above, but exhibits features which suggest it could be classified as
a ‘simple building’, it may still be possible to assess the building as such. Please contact breeam@bre.co.uk for further advice
and classification.
. The table below summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues, credits and criteria applicable to an
assessment of a 'simple building'.
Table - 1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 issue applicability for simple building assessments
Management
Man 01 ü 2 2
Man 02 ü 1 0
Man 03 ü 4 0
Man 04 ü 4 0
Man 05 ü 3 0
Hea 04 ü 3 0
Hea 06 ü 2 0
370 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments Appendices
Energy
Ene 01 ü 12 5
Ene 03 ü 1 0
Ene 04 ü 3 0
Ene 06 ü 2 0
Ene 08 ü 2 0
Ene 09 ü 1 0
Transport
Water
Wat 01 ü 5 1
Wat 02 ü 1 0
Wat 03 ü 2 0
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 371
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Materials
Mat 02 ü 1 0
Mat 03 ü 3 TBC
Mat 04 ü 1 0
Mat 05 ü 1 0
Mat 06 ü 1 0
Waste
Wst 01 ü 3 1
Wst 02 ..ü 1 1
Wst 03 ü 1 0
Wst 04 ü 1 0
Wst 5 ü 1 1
Wst 6 ü 1 0
LE 01 ü 2 0
LE 02 ü 2 0
LE 03 ü 2 0
LE 04 ü 2 0
LE 05 ü N/A N/A
372 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments Appendices
Pollution
Pol 03 ü 5 1
Pol 04 ü 1 0
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 373
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Appendix F – TBA
374 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix G – TBA Appendices
Appendix G – TBA
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 375
Appendices BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Construction certificates
Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates for the interim design stage and final post construction stage are
provided in Figure 3 and Figure 4 respectively.
376 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates Appendices
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 377
Index BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction
B Communication strategy 35
378 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Index
Construction zone 72, 135, 236, 291, 296, 305, 350 Energy meters 131
Counterbalancing 151 F
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 379
Index BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction
GWP 322
M
380 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
Index
Public 253
S
Public areas 73
SAP 124-125
Q SBEM 124-125
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 381
Index BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction
Staff areas 74
V
Standard Assessment Procedure for Energy Rating of
Dwellings 124 View of sky 74
Sub-meters 131
W
SuDS management train 344
Waste compactor 277
SuDS Techniques 344
Waste hierarchy 264
Suitably qualified acoustician 108, 353
Waste treatment 277
Suitably qualified ecologist 297, 305, 310, 315
Watercourses and sewers 345
Suitably qualified professionals 52
Weighted standardised impact sound pressure
Surface Water Run-off 344
level 108
Surrounding 74
Weighted standardized level differences 108
Sustainability Champion 46
White goods 162
Sustainability Champion (design) 37
Working plane 74
Sustainable Procurement Plan 243
Toxic fumes 89
Treatment 344
382 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014
383
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014 384